+ All Categories
Home > Documents > VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II...

VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II...

Date post: 19-Mar-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 5 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
242
PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M, or Fanuc 18-MC Control Revised: July 26, 2004 Manual No. M-377B Litho in U.S.A. Part No. M B-0009500-0377 October, 2002
Transcript
Page 1: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL

VMC Series IIVertical Machining Centers

Equipped with the

Hardinge / Fanuc System II,

Fanuc 0i-M, or Fanuc 18-MC Control

Revised: July 26, 2004

Manual No. M-377B Litho in U.S.A.Part No. M B-0009500-0377 October, 2002

Page 2: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTICE -Damage resulting from misuse, negligence, or accident is not covered by theHardinge Machine Warranty.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

This manual covers the programming of Hardinge VMC Series II VerticalMachining Centers equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc0i-M, or Fanuc 18-MC Control.

In no event will Hardinge Inc. be responsible for indirect or consequentialdamage resulting from the use or application of the information in this manual.

Reproduction of this manual in whole or in part, without written permissionof Hardinge Inc., is prohibited.

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

- WARNINGS -Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of personal injuryor damage to the machine, tooling, or workpiece.

- CAUTIONS -Cautions must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of damage to themachine, tooling, or workpiece.

- NOTES -Notes contain supplemental information.

Hardinge Inc.One Hardinge Drive

P.O. Box 1507Elmira, New York 14902-1507 USA

www.hardinge.com

2002, Hardinge Inc. M-377B

Page 3: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

READ COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING ORPROGRAMMING HARDINGE VMC SERIES II VERTICAL MACHINING CENTERS.

- WARNING -Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Hazard Communica-tion Standard 1910.1200, effective September 23, 1987, and various state “em-ployee right-to-know laws” require that information regarding chemicals usedwith this machine be supplied to you. The list of chemicals appears in manualSP-134, the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Refer to the applicable sec-tion of the MSDS supplied with your machine when handling, storing, or dis-posing of chemicals. Store MSDS of other chemicals used with this machine inthe same packet with manual SP-134.

HARDINGE SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONSYour Hardinge machine is designed and built for maximum ease and safety of operation.

Since some previously accepted shop practices may not reflect current safety regulations andprocedures, they should be re-examined to insure compliance with the current safety and healthstandards.

Hardinge Inc. recommends that all shop supervisors, maintenance personnel, and machinetool operators be advised of the importance of safe maintenance, setup, and operation of allequipment. Our recommendations are described below. READ THESE SAFETY RECOMMEN-DATIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER.

READ THE APPROPRIATE MANUAL OR INSTRUCTIONS before attempting operation,programming, or maintenance of the machine. Make certain that you understand all in-structions.

DON’T ALLOW the operation or repair of equipment by untrained personnel.

CONSULT YOUR SUPERVISOR when in doubt as to the correct way to do a job.

WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND PROPER FOOT PROTECTION at all times. Wear a res-pirator, helmet, gloves, and ear muffs or plugs when necessary.

DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT unless proper maintenance has been regularly per-formed and the equipment is known to be in good working order.

WARNING and INSTRUCTION TAGS are mounted on the machine for your safety and in-formation. Do not remove them.

DON’T ALTER THE MACHINE to bypass any interlock, overload, disconnect switch, orother safety devices.

DON’T OPERATE ANY MACHINE while wearing rings, watches, jewelry, loose clothing,or neckties. Long hair must be contained by a net or shop cap for safety.

MAKE CERTAIN that the equipment is properly grounded. Consult and comply with theNational Electric Code and all local codes.

M-377B i

Page 4: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DISCONNECT MAIN ELECTRICAL POWER before attempting repair or maintenance.

DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT if unusual or excessive heat, noise, smoke, or vibrationoccurs. Report any excessive or unusual conditions as well as any damaged parts to yoursupervisor.

ALLOW ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL to have access to enclosures containingelectrical equipment.

DON’T REACH into any control or power case area unless electrical power is OFF.

DON’T TOUCH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT when hands are wet or when standing on awet surface.

REPLACE BLOWN FUSES with fuses of the same size and type as originally furnished.

ASCERTAIN AND CORRECT the cause of any shutdown before restarting the machine.

KEEP THE AREA AROUND THE MACHINE well lighted and dry.

KEEP CHEMICALS AND FLAMMABLE MATERIAL away from operating equipment.

HAVE THE CORRECT TYPE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER handy when machining combus-tible material and keep the chips clear of the work area.

DON’T USE a toxic or flammable substance as a solvent cleaner or coolant.

INSPECT ALL SAFETY DEVICES AND GUARDS to make certain that they are in goodcondition and are functioning properly.

MAKE CERTAIN THAT PROPER GUARDS are in place and that all doors and covers arein place and secured before starting a machining cycle.

DON’T OPEN GUARDS while any machine component is in motion. Make certain that allpeople in the area are clear of the machine when opening the guard door.

MAKE SURE that all spindle tools and any tool-holding devices are properly mounted.

MAKE SURE that fixture plates and all other table-mounted work-holding devices areproperly mounted.

MAKE CERTAIN that all tooling is secured either in the tool magazine or spindle beforestarting the machine.

DON’T USE worn or defective hand tools. Use the proper size and type tool for the job be-ing performed.

ii M-377B

Page 5: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

USE CAUTION around exposed mechanisms and tooling especially when setting up. Becareful of sharp edges on tools.

USE ONLY a soft-faced hammer on table work-holding devices and fixtures.

MAKE CERTAIN that all tool mounting surfaces are clean before mounting tools.

DON’T USE worn or broken tooling on the machine.

INSPECT ALL WORK-HOLDING DEVICES daily to make certain that they are in goodoperating condition. Replace any defective devices before operating the machine.

ANY ATTACHMENT, TOOL, OR MACHINE MODIFICATION obtained from any sourceother than Hardinge Inc., must be reviewed by a qualified safety engineer before installa-tion.

USE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE gripping pressure on work-holding devices. Consider theweight, shape, and balance of the tooling.

DON’T EXCEED the rated capacity of the machine.

DON’T LEAVE tools, workpieces, or other loose items where they can come in contactwith a moving component of the machine.

REMOVE ANY LOOSE PARTS OR TOOLS from the work area before operating the ma-chine. Always clear the machine and work area of tools and parts, especially after workhas been completed by maintenance personnel.

REMOVE SPINDLE WRENCHES before starting the machine.

CHECK THE SETUP, TOOLING, AND SECURE THE WORKPIECE if the machine hasbeen turned OFF for any length of time.

CHECK THE LUBRICATION AND COOLANT LEVELS and the status of control indicatorlights before operating the machine.

KNOW where all EMERGENCY STOP push buttons are located.

MAKE CERTAIN THAT PROPER FUNCTIONS are programmed and that all controls areset in the desired modes before pressing the Cycle Start push button.

DRY CYCLE a new setup to check for programming errors.

DON’T ADJUST tooling, workpiece, or coolant hoses while the machine is running.

KEEP CLEAR of any “pinch point” and any potentially hazardous situation.

DON’T LEAVE the machine unattended while it is operating.

M-377B iii

Page 6: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DON’T REMOVE OR LOAD workpieces while any part of the machine is in motion.

BE CAREFUL of sharp edges when handling newly machined workpieces.

DON’T CHECK the finish or dimension of a workpiece near a running spindle or movingslide.

DON’T ATTEMPT to brake or slow the machine with hands or any makeshift device.

DON’T REMOVE CHIPS with hands. Make certain that all machine movement hasstopped and then use a hook or similar device to remove chips and shavings.

DON’T CLEAN the machine with an air hose.

KEEP TOTE PANS a safe distance from machine. Don’t overfill the tote pans.

Unless otherwise noted, all operating and maintenance procedures are to be performedby one person. To avoid injury to yourself and others, be sure that all personnel are clearof the machine when opening or closing the coolant guard door and any access covers.

FOR YOUR PROTECTION - WORK SAFELY

iv M-377B

Page 7: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- Contents -

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGEProgramming the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Legal Characters (Excluding Macro Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Data Word Format Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

English Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Special Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Tape Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Keyboard Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8X, Y, and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Decimal Point Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10O Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10N Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

G00 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G01 Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise Arc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G03 Circular Interpolation (Counterclockwise Arc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G04 Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G09 Exact Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G10 Data Setting Mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G11 Data Setting Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G12 Circular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G13 Circular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G15 Polar Coordinate Programming OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G16 Polar Coordinate Programming ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G17 XY Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G18 XZ Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G19 YZ Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G20 Inch Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G21 Metric Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G27 Reference Position Return Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G28 Return to Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G29 Return from Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G30 Return to Tool Change Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G31 Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G39 Corner Offset Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G40 Tool Diameter Compensation Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G41 Tool Diameter Compensation Active - Tool Left of Part . . . . . . . . . 1-18G42 Tool Diameter Compensation Active - Tool Right of Part . . . . . . . . . 1-18G43 Tool Length Compensation Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19G49 Tool Length Compensation Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19G50 Scaling Mode OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

M-377B v

Page 8: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G51 Scaling Mode ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19G52 Local Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19G54 ~ G59 Standard Work Coordinate Systems (G54 Default) . . . . . . . . 1-19G54 P_ Additional Work Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20G60 Single Direction Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20G61 Exact Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20G62 Automatic Corner Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G63 Tapping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G64 Cutting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21G65 Non-Modal Macro Program Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G66 Modal Macro Program Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G67 Modal Macro Program Call Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22G68 Coordinate Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23G69 Coordinate Rotation Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23G71 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G72 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G73 High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G74 Left-Hand Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G76 Fine Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24G80 Cycle Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G81 Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G82 Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G83 Peck Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G84 Right-Hand Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25G85 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26G86 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26G87 Back Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26G88 Boring Cycle (with Manual Retract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26G89 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26G90 Absolute Positioning Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27G91 Incremental Positioning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27G92 Coordinate Shift / Constant Surface Speed RPM Limit . . . . . . . . . . 1-27G94 Inches / Millimeter Per Minute Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27G95 Inches / Millimeter Per Revolution Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28G96 Constant Surface Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28G97 Direct RPM Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28G98 Return to Initial Point in Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28G99 Return to R Point in Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

X Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Incremental Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Dwell Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Y Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Incremental Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Incremental Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

I Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33J Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33K Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33C Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

vi M-377B

Page 9: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

R Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33P Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Q Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34D Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34H Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35F Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35S Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

M00 Program Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M01 Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M02 End of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M03 Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M04 Spindle Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M05 Spindle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M06 Automatic Tool Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M08 Coolant Pump ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M09 Coolant Pump OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M10 Rotary Table Brake ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M11 Rotary Table Brake OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M13 Spindle Forward / Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M14 Spindle Reverse / Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M15 Spindle Stop / Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M16 Air Blast OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M17 Air Blast ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M19 Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M20 Spindle Orient Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M21 X Axis Mirror Image ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M22 Y Axis Mirror Image ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M23 Mirror Image Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M24 Work Light ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M25 Work Light OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M29 Rigid Tapping Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M30 End of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M41 Spindle Low Gear (High Torque Machine Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M42 Spindle High Gear (High Torque Machine Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40M51 Chip Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M52 Chip Coolant OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M53 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M54 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M68 Chip Conveyor ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M69 Chip Conveyor OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M71 Tool Magazine 1 Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M72 Tool Magazine 1 Extend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M73 Tool Magazine 1 Spindle Tool Clamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41M74 Tool Magazine 1 Spindle Tool Unclamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M75 Search Spindle Tool Number (Magazine 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M76 Activate Tool Change Mode (Magazine 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M77 Cancel Tool Change Mode (Magazine 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M80 Automatic Power OFF Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

M-377B vii

Page 10: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M81 Tool Magazine 2 Home [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42M82 Tool Magazine 2 Extend [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M83 Tool Magazine 2 Spindle Tool Clamp [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M84 Tool Magazine 2 Spindle Tool Unclamp [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M85 Search Spindle Tool Number (Magazine 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M86 Activate Tool Change Mode (Magazine 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43M87 Cancel Tool Change Mode (Magazine 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M98 Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M99 Subprogram End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M100 Circular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M101 Circular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44M102 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45M103 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion . . . . . . . . . 1-45

Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

CHAPTER 2 - TOOL COMPENSATION

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Tool Offset Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Tool Diameter Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Tool Length Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Tool Compensation Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Activating Tool Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Programming Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Entering and Exiting the Workpiece with Tool Compensation Active . . . . . . . . . 2-6Switching G41 / G42 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Tool Moved Away from the Workpiece with Tool Compensation Active . . . . . . . 2-8Canceling Tool Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Tool Diameter Compensation Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Absolute and Incremental Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Incremental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Insert Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Alarm Messages for Insert Chamfer / Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . 3-3

Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5G02 Clockwise Arc (CW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5G03 Counterclockwise Arc (CCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Automatic Corner Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Helical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Sample Part Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Circular Interpolation Parameter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

viii M-377B

Page 11: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 4 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMSIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Zero Return (Reference Home) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2X, Y, and Z Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rectangular Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Coordinate System Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Standard Programmable Work Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Additional Programmable Work Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6To Store Coordinate System Data from a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6G52 Local Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Activating G52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Canceling G52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

G92 Absolute Coordinate Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9G92 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Polar Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Positioning Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Absolute Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Incremental Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Polar Coordinate Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Sample Program Segment for a Bolt Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

CHAPTER 5 - TOOL SELECTION AND OFFSETSAutomatic Tool Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Commanding Tool Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1M06 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Drum Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Swing Arm Tool Magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Suggested Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Tool Length Offsets (H Word) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Tool Diameter Offsets (D Word) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

To Store Tool Offsets from the Part Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Activating Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Canceling Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

CHAPTER 6 - STANDARD MILLINGIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1G90/G91 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Compensation Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Tool Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1G41 Cutter Left of Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1G42 Cutter Right of Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Tool Offset Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Length Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Diameter Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

M-377B ix

Page 12: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 7 - POCKET MILLINGIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Pocket Milling G Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Pocket Milling M Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Tool Offsets for Pocket Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Tool Offset Memory B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tool Offset Memory C [Option]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Circular Pocket Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Rough Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Single Finish Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Rectangular Pocket Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Rough Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

CHAPTER 8 - DRILLING CYCLESIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1G90/G91 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1G98/G99 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Canceling Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Peck Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Tool Movement in the G73 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Tool Movement in the G83 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Single Pass Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Drilling Multiple Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Program Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

x M-377B

Page 13: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 9 - BORING CYCLESIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1G90/G91 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1G98/G99 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Canceling Boring Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2General Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Orientation Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Parameter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Establishing the Offset Axis and Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

G76 Fine Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Tool Movement in the G76 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

G85 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Tool Movement in the G85 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

G86 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Tool Movement in the G86 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

G87 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Tool Movement in the G87 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

G88 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Tool Movement in the G88 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

G89 Boring Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Tool Movement in the G89 Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Boring Multiple Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Sample Program Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

M-377B xiRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 14: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 10 - TAPPING CYCLESIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Tapping Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Conventional Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Rigid Tapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Tapping Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2G90/G91 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2G98/G99 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Canceling Tapping Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Single Pass Tapping Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Data Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Tapping Multiple Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Sample Program Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Program Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

CHAPTER 11 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENTGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Tool Life Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Number of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Amount of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

General Program Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Inputting New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Updating Existing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Deleting Existing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

P Word - Tool Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4L Word - Tool Life Value Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5T Word - Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5H Word - Tool Length Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5D Word - Tool Diameter Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Sample Tool Life Management Program (Inputting New Data) . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Data Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Combining Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool Commands . . . . . . 11-8

xii M-377B

Page 15: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 12 - OPTIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS FEATURESInch / Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Establishing Inch / Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3G96 Constant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Scaling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Types of Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Uniform Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Independent Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Scale Factors for Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8Scale Factors for Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Mirror Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9

Scaling Mode Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11Macro Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

Non-Modal Macro Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12Modal Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12Macro Call Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

Single Direction Positioning (G60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13Determining Direction and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13

Machines Equipped with Hardinge / Fanuc System II Control . . . . . . . . . 12-13Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14

Machines Equipped with Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc 18-MC Control . . . . . . . . 12-15Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16Sample Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16

Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17Programming the 4th Axis [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18Description of Sample Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18Sample Part Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19

M-377B xiiiRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 16: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

APPENDIXTravel Specifications

X and Y AxisVMC600II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1VMC800II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2VMC1000II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3VMC1250II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4VMC1500II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

Z AxisVMC 600II, 800II, and 1000II Machining Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6VMC1250II and 1500II Machining Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

Tool Slot Locations and ConfigurationVMC600II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8VMC800II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9VMC1000II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10VMC1250II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11VMC1500II Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

G Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13M Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19

xiv M-377B

Page 17: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B xv

Page 18: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

xvi M-377B

Page 19: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGEA part program is an ordered set of instructions which define slide and spindle motion as well

as auxiliary functions. These instructions are written in a part program language consisting of aseries of data blocks. Each data block contains adequate information for the machine tool toperform one or more machine functions.

A data block consists of one or more data words, which are treated together as a unit. Eachdata word consists of a word address followed by a numerical value. A word address is a letterwhich specifies the meaning of the data word.

The value of the number that follows the word address has a format which specifies the num-ber of characters the word contains as well as the range these values must fall within. Theseformats are outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tables onpages 1-2 and 1-4.

PROGRAMMING THE CONTROL

INTRODUCTION

Programming Hardinge machining centers requires an understanding of the machine, tooling,and control.

Extreme care must be exercised when writing a part program or punching a tape since allmachine movements will be executed as programmed. A miscalculation or selection of an incor-rect function can result in an incorrect motion.

The basic unit of part program input is the “BLOCK”. Normally, one line or block of informa-tion represents one describable operation or several describable operations that are independentof each other. (For example, axis movement and spindle speed changes are independent opera-tions which may be programmed in the same block.) A block may contain any or all of the fol-lowing:

1. Block Delete code (/)

2. Sequence number (N Function)

3. Preparatory Functions (G Function)

4. Axis Movement Instructions (X, Y, and Z Functions)

5. Feedrate Command (F Function)

6. Spindle Speed Command (S Function)

7. Tool and Offset Selection (T, D, and H Functions)

8. Miscellaneous Functions (M Function)

A block MUST contain a valid End of Block character.

LEGAL CHARACTERS (Excluding Macro Language)

Legal alpha characters for the control are those used as word addresses in a part programblock that the control will accept and act on. All illegal alpha characters on tape or disk will beloaded into memory, but will result in a decoding error when program execution is attempted.The illegal character must be removed or replaced with a legal character. The following charac-ters are illegal:

E, U, V, and W

M-377B 1-1

Page 20: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DATA WORD FORMAT CHARTS

English ModeRefer to the key on page 1-3.

Function(Data Word)

PreparatoryCommands

Format MinimumValue

MaximumValue

O (Program Number)

N (Block Number)

G (Command)

M (Command)

-

-

-

-

O4

N4

G3

M3

1

1

0

0

8999

9999

152

103

P (Dwell)

P (Subprogram)

P (Offset)

Q (Depth of Cut)

G04

-

G10

G73,G83

P8

P7

P2

Q4

1

1

1

1

99999999

9998999

32

9999

X (Absolute) 1

X (Absolute) 2

X (Absolute) 3

X (Absolute) 4

X (Absolute) 5

X (Incremental)

X (Dwell)

Y (Absolute) 6

Y (Absolute) 7

Y (Incremental)

Z (Absolute) 6

Z (Absolute) 7

Z (Incremental)

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G91,G00,G01,G02,G03

G04

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G91,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G91,G00,G01,G02,G03

X±2.4

X±2.4

X±2.4

X±2.4

X±2.4

X±2.4

X5.3

Y±2.4

Y±2.4

Y±2.4

Z±2.4

Z±2.4

Z±2.4

.0001

.0001

.0001

.0001

.0001

.0001

.001

.0001

.0001

.0001

-20.0787

-25.0000

.0001

23.6220

31.4961

40.1575

49.2126

60.0000

-

99999.999

20.1574

26.0630

-

0.0787

0.0787

-

X (Zero Offset)

Y (Zero Offset)

Z (Zero Offset)

G10

G10

G10

X±2.4

Y±2.4

Z±2.4

0.

0.

0.

-

-

-

D (Tool Diameter Offset)

H (Tool Length Offset)

G41,G42

G43

D2

H2

0

0

200

200

I (Circular Interpolation)

J (Circular Interpolation)

K (Circular Interpolation)

G02,G03

G02,G03

G02,G03

I±3.4

J±3.4

K±3.4

0.

0.

0.

999.9999

999.9999

999.9999

F (Feedrate, per min)

F (Feedrate, per rev)

G94

G95

F3.2

F1.4

.01

.0001

472.

9.9999

S (Spindle Speed) 8

S (Spindle Speed) 9

S (Spindle Speed) 10

-

-

-

S4

S4

S4

0

0

0

8000

12000

15000

1-2 M-377B

Page 21: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

T (Tool Select) 11

T (Tool Select) [Option] 12

T (Tool Select) [Option] 13

-

-

-

T2

T2

T2

1

1

1

20

40

24

C (Insert Chamfer)

R (Insert Radius)

R (Radius)

R (Coordinate Rotation)

G01

G01

G02,G03

G68

C2.4

R2.4

R2.4

R�3.3

.0001

.0001

-

.001

-

-

-

360

Key for Data Word Format Charts

1. VMC600II Machining Center

2. VMC800II Machining Center

3. VMC1000II Machining Center

4. VMC1250II Machining Center

5. VMV1500II Machining Center

6. VMC600II, 800II, and 1000II Machining Centers

7. VMC1250II, and 1500II Machining Centers

8. Machining Center equipped with standard or optional high torque spindle

9. Machining Center equipped with optional 12,000 rpm high speed spindle

10. Machining Center equipped with optional 15,000 rpm high speed spindle

11. Machining Center equipped with one drum tool magazine

12. Machining Center equipped with two drum tool magazines [Option]

13. Machining Center equipped with one swing arm tool magazine [Option]

M-377B 1-3

Page 22: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Metric ModeRefer to the key on page 1-3.

Function(Data Word)

PreparatoryCommands

Format MinimumValue

MaximumValue

O (Program Number)

N (Block Number)

G (Command)

M (Command)

-

-

-

-

O4

N4

G3

M3

1

1

0

0

8999

9999

152

103

P (Dwell)

P (Subprogram)

P (Offset)

Q (Depth of Cut)

G04

-

G10

G73,G83

P8

P7

P2

Q4

1

1

1

1

99999999

9998999

32

9999

X (Absolute) 1

X (Absolute) 2

X (Absolute) 3

X (Absolute) 4

X (Absolute) 5

X (Incremental)

X (Dwell)

Y (Absolute) 6

Y (Absolute) 7

Y (Incremental)

Z (Absolute) 6

Z (Absolute) 7

Z (Incremental)

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G91,G00,G01,G02,G03

G04

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G91,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G90,G00,G01,G02,G03

G91,G00,G01,G02,G03

X±3.3

X±3.3

X±3.3

X±3.3

X±3.3

X±3.3

X5.3

Y±3.3

Y±3.3

Y±3.3

Z±3.3

Z±3.3

Z±3.3

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

.001

-510.000

-635.000

.001

600.000

800.000

1020.000

1250.000

1524.000

-

99999.999

512.000

662.000

-

2.000

2.000

-

X (Zero Offset)

Y (Zero Offset)

Z (Zero Offset)

G10

G10

G10

X±2.4

Y±2.4

Z±2.4

0.

0.

0.

-

-

-

D (Tool Diameter Offset)

H (Tool Length Offset)

G41,G42

G43

D2

H2

0

0

200

200

I (Circular Interpolation)

J (Circular Interpolation)

K (Circular Interpolation)

G02,G03

G02,G03

G02,G03

I±3.4

J±3.4

K±3.4

0.

0.

0.

999.9999

999.9999

999.9999

F (Feedrate, per min)

F (Feedrate, per rev)

G94

G95

F5.0

F3.2

1.

.01

12000.

500.

S (Spindle Speed) 8

S (Spindle Speed) 9

S (Spindle Speed) 10

-

-

-

S4

S4

S4

0

0

0

8000

12000

15000

1-4 M-377B

Page 23: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

T (Tool Select) 11

T (Tool Select) [Option] 12

T (Tool Select ) [Option] 13

-

-

-

T2

T2

T2

1

1

1

20

40

24

C (Insert Chamfer)

R (Insert Radius)

R (Radius)

R (Coordinate Rotation)

G01

G01

G02,G03

G68

C2.4

R2.4

R2.4

R�3.3

.0001

.0001

-

.001

-

-

-

360

M-377B 1-5

Page 24: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SPECIAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS

An End of Record character (%) should be the first and last character on a punched tapewhich is to be uploaded to the machine control by means of the RS-232 serial port. If multipleprograms are to be loaded from a single punched tape, it may be desirable to place an End ofRecord character between each of the programs. All End of Record characters must be followedby an End of Block character.

The End of Block character (;) must be used after the last character in each data block of apart program that is to be loaded into the memory of the control. If the End of Block character isomitted from a part program data block, the control will consider the next block to be part of theblock missing the End of Block. This may cause undesirable machine behavior.

The End of Block character is a Carriage Return character in EIA (RS-224-B) format and aLine Feed character in ASCII (ISO) (RS-358-B) format. When programming from the keyboard,use the End of Block key. This character will be displayed as a semicolon (;) on the control dis-play screen.

Operator messages and comments can be included in part programs loaded through theRS-232 serial port, provided they are enclosed in parentheses. Any legal ASCII character canbe used when writing a comment.

The Block Skip (/) code inserted at the beginning of a data block will cause that block of datato be ignored by the control when Block Skip is activated by the machine operator. When BlockSkip is not active, the data block will be executed.

PROGRAMMING FORMAT

Programs to be executed by the control consist of alpha-numeric words that the control recog-nizes as specific commands. These words consist of one letter addresses and the designatednumbers for that address. Words within a block may follow any convenient sequence. However,Hardinge recommends the following sequence:

/, N, G, X, Y, Z, I, J, K, C, R, P, Q, D, H, F, S, T, M

The software for the system was configured to provide a programming resolution of .0001inch [.001 mm], which causes specific data word formats to be applied to the associated values.These formats are outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tableson pages 1-2 and 1-4. These numbers designate the maximum number of places allowed to theright and left of the decimal point.

A plus sign need not be entered since the control assumes plus if no sign is entered. A minussign MUST be programmed, if needed.

The program format shown on page 1-46 outlines the part program format taught and used bythe Hardinge Customer Training School.

- NOTE -It is strongly recommended that the programmer follow the Hardinge ProgrammingFormat.

1-6 M-377B

Page 25: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

Tape Programming SequenceThe sequence in which a tape should be programmed is as follows:

1. A few inches of tape feed (leader), as required.

2. Enter program ID code and program number. All programs are identified by the letter“O” in front of the part program ID number and may have 4 place ID numbers (1 -8999). Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for macro programs. The pro-gram ID code and program number are followed by a valid End of Block character.

3. Enter the program.

4. End of Program command (M02, M30) in the last data block. All data blocks must endwith a valid End of Block character.

5. Enter the End of Record character.

6. A few inches of tape feed (trailer), as required.

Keyboard Programming SequenceTo program from the keyboard, follow this procedure:

1. Select Edit mode.

2. Enable program editing. Refer to the machine operator’s manual (M-400) for informationon enabling program editing.

3. Press the Program key.

- NOTE -Part programs are identified by the letter “O” in front of the part program ID numberand may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999). Program numbers 9000 through9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID code and program numberare followed by a valid End of Block character. An example of a program numberis “O2222".

4. Enter the program ID code and program number; then, press the Insert key. The cur-rently active program is cleared from the display. The new program number and the Endof Record character are displayed.

- NOTE -A valid End of Block character must be entered at the end of each data block.

Each letter address and value must be inserted separately.

5. Key in each letter address and value.

6. Press the Insert key.

7. Press the End of Block key and the Insert key at the end of each data block.

8. The End of Program command (M02 or M30) must be placed at the end of the program,followed by a valid End of Block character.

9. Disable program editing.

M-377B 1-7

Page 26: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAM NUMBER

Part programs stored in the control memory must be assigned a part program number. Theprogram numbers are used by the control to identify the various programs and subprogramswhich are stored in the control memory.

The part program numbers range from 1 to 8999. However, the following restrictions must beobserved when assigning program numbers:

1. Alpha and other miscellaneous characters (such as dashes) are not allowed.

2. Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for permanent macro programs en-tered on the Master Macro Tape. These numbers cannot be assigned to other part pro-grams or macros.

The program number MUST be identified by the letter “O” followed by the program identifica-tion number. It is not necessary to program the leading zeros as these are automatically insertedby the control, when needed. The program number must be on the first line of the program. Itmay be programmed on a line by itself or it may be the first entry in the first data block.

- NOTE -When entering a program from the keyboard, if the program identification numberis omitted, the active part program will be edited according to the data enteredwhen the Insert key is pressed. If one of the 9000 series permanent macro pro-grams is active and no program number is entered, the first program data block willbe rejected and the message “Write Protect” will be displayed on the control dis-play screen.

When a tape which does not contain a program identification number is loaded into memory,the control will automatically assign the first programmed sequence number as the programnumber.

Any attempt to store programs having numbers already stored in program memory will causethe message “Already Exists” to be displayed on the control display screen. This message indi-cates that the program identification number has already been assigned.

X, Y, AND Z AXES

The axes of motion parallel to the spindle face are the X and Y axes. The axis of motion par-allel to the spindle centerline is the Z axis. These letter designations for the three axes are rec-ommended by the Electronic Industries Association (E.I.A.). In an effort to promoteinterchangeability and prevent misunderstandings between CNC manufacturers and purchasers,recommended standards have been set forth by E.I.A. These standards include the following:axis designation, axis motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape, operationalcommand format, data format, and electrical interface between controls and machine tools.

1-8 M-377B

Page 27: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

A decimal point should be used with the following address words: A, B, C, F, I, K, R, X, Y,and Z. If a decimal point is programmed in a word in which a decimal point is not allowed (G, M,N, O, P, Q, S, or T word) or if two or more decimal points appear in any one data word, an errormessage will be displayed.

Values with or without decimal points may be commanded in the same data block.

Trailing zeros need not be programmed when using decimal point programming.

- CAUTION -The programmer must make certain all decimal points are correctly positionedto prevent undesirable machine behavior.

If no decimal point is programmed, the control uses the appropriate data word format to insertleading zeros and properly position the decimal point.

Example: In Inch mode (G20), the format for the Z word is ±2.4 . If Z4. is programmed, thecontrol will assume Z4.0000 .

This assumed decimal point is an important concept to keep in mind. There can be a greatdeal of difference between values with and without decimal points.

The following example is written in inch mode (G20).

Example: The command X2. sends the table to coordinate X2.0000, however, the com-mand X2 sends the table to X.0002 . Be sure the decimal point is programmedwhen allowed.

Besides specifying the location of the assumed decimal point, data word formats also indi-cates the maximum number of digits which can appear to the left and right of the decimal point.Refer to the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4.

M-377B 1-9

Page 28: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONSOn the following pages are descriptions of the data words used with the control.

O WORD

The O word is used as the letter address for part program numbers and must precede thepart program identification number. Refer to Program Number, on page 1-8.

N WORD

The N word provides a sequence number consisting of the letter “N” and up to four digits(0000 - 9999). It is not required to have a sequence number in any block. When used, they maybe placed anywhere in the block; however, it is customary to program them as the first word inthe block, except when a Block Delete (/) is programmed. Block Delete codes, when pro-grammed, will be the first character in a block.

The N word does not affect machine operation. However, it gives operators a valuable refer-ence should they wish to relate an operation being performed to the program manuscript.

The numbering sequence can begin with any number, such as N0001. It is recommended thatthe programmer assign sequence numbers in intervals of five or ten so that additional blockscan be inserted into the program, if necessary. This eliminates the necessity of reassigning se-quence numbers after blocks are added to the program. The only exception to this recommen-dation is that the block starting each operation be assigned the number of the tool offset to beused during that operation. For example, when using tool offset #6, N6 will be the block numberto start that operation.

Leading zeros may be omitted.

G WORD

The G word is a preparatory command which sets up the control for a specific type of opera-tion. It has the word format G3 from 0 to 152. Certain G codes are default codes automaticallyactivated by the control under the following conditions:

1. Machine Power-up

2. Reading an End of Program Code (M02/M30)

3. Control Reset

4. Emergency Stop

The G codes are of two types:

1. Non-modal or one-shot G codes are effective only in the block in which they are pro-grammed.

2. Modal G codes are effective until replaced by another G code in the same group.

A chart in the Appendix lists the G codes that are used with the control by groups.

Only one G code from each group is permitted in a data block. If more than one G code froma group is programmed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the last of the conflicting Gcodes entered in the data block will be the active G code.

G codes containing a leading zero may be programmed without the zero.

Example: G01 may be programmed as G1

1-10 M-377B

Page 29: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G00 Positioning(Group 1 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. This positioning command generates linear motion on theX, Y, and Z axes between the programmed end points at a rate determined by the Rapid Over-ride switch. When this switch is set to 100% or higher, motion takes place at the rapid traverserates of 1181 ipm [30,000 mm/min] on the X, Y, and Z axes.

Axis moves are expressed as X, Y, and Z for absolute moves and incremental moves. Referto G90 and G91 for information on commanding absolute and incremental axis moves.

A programmed feedrate (F Function) is ignored by the control when G00 is active.

When a move on both the X and Y axes is programmed, the axes execute a vectorial moveat a traverse rate which is a result of the X and Y rapid traverse. When a G00 positioning moveis programmed and the Rapid Override switch is set to 100% or higher, both axes will move atmaximum traverse.

The G00 command is modal. A programmed G00 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G00 command.

G01 Linear Interpolation(Group 1 G Code)

Linear Interpolation generates linear motion on the X, Y, or Z axis. All X, Y, and Z axis motionaxis between the programmed end points occurs at a rate specified by a feedrate command inthe same block or by an active feedrate from a preceding block. The programmed feedrate is di-rectly affected by the Feedrate Override switch. Maximum programmable feedrate is 472 ipm[12,000 mm/min] on the X, Y, and Z axes.

Axis distance is expressed as X, Y, and Z for absolute and incremental moves. When multipleaxes are programmed for a taper cut, the control will compensate the X, Y, and Z axis feedratesto produce a vectorial velocity equal to the programmed feedrate. That is, when multiple axesare programmed, a vectorial move is generated.

The G01 command is modal. A programmed G01 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G01 command.

M-377B 1-11Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 30: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G02 Circular Interpolation (Clockwise Arc)(Group 1 G Code)

Refer to Figure 3.3 for the path traced by the tool for a clockwise arc.

The arc direction is determined by the path of the cutting tool in relation to the arc center, asviewed from a specific direction.

The G02 command is used with I, J, and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) toprovide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.

A G17, G18, or G19 plane selection command is used with G02 to specify which two axesare involved in the interpolated move. G17 is the default plane selection at power-up.

The G02 command is modal. A programmed G02 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G02 command. For additionalinformation, refer to Circular Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

G03 Circular Interpolation (Counterclockwise Arc)(Group 1 G Code)

Refer to Figure 3.3 for the path traced by the tool for a counterclockwise arc.

The arc direction is determined by the path of the cutting tool in relation to the arc center, asviewed from a specific direction.

The G03 command is used with I, J, and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) toprovide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.

A G17, G18, or G19 plane selection command is used with G03 to specify which two axesare involved in the interpolated move. G17 is the default plane selection at power-up.

The G03 command is modal. A programmed G03 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G03 command. For additionalinformation, refer to Circular Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

1-12 M-377B

Page 31: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G04 Dwell(Group 0 G Code)

A dwell command must be programmed with a X or P word to specify the duration of thedwell in seconds. The dwell period can be from .001 to 99999.999 seconds.

The G04 Preparatory Command and its associated X or P word must be programmed to-gether in a data block that does not generate axis motion.

- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when the P word is used to specify thedwell period. The P word specifies dwell in milliseconds. Leading zero suppressionformat may be used, but trailing zeros must be used.

Example: A dwell of 2.5 seconds may be programmed in any of the following ways:

G04 X2.5 ;G04 P2500 ;

The dwell code is non-modal and does not change the status of any modal condition of thecontrol. Following the dwell, the operating mode reverts to the same status as before the dwell.The previous feedrate is reinstated.

When G04 command is programmed without a time factor (X or P word), it will be interpretedas a non-modal exact stop command. Refer to G09 for more information on the non-modal exactstop command.

G09 Exact Stop(Group 0 G Code)

Due to automatic acceleration and deceleration, corners are not cut sharply during a transitionfrom one cutting move to another cutting move.

G09 commands the actual tool path to match the programmed tool path.

The G09 command is non-modal and must be programmed each time it is required. Refer toG61 for information on establishing exact stop mode.

M-377B 1-13

Page 32: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G10 Data Setting Mode ON(Group 0 G Code)

The G10 command permits entering the Work Shift Offsets and/or Tool Offsets using the fol-lowing methods rather than entering the offset(s) individually at the Manual Data Input keyboard:

- Entering the necessary offset(s) from a part program

- Entering the necessary offset(s) from a separate program

When offsets are entered from the part program, they should be located near the beginning ofthe part program. This will ensure that the offsets are entered when used in the program.

As many offsets as needed may be entered from a separate program. The G10 preparatorycommand is modal and, once programmed, remains active until canceled by G11. Refer toChapter 4 and Chapter 5 for additional information on using the G10 command.

G11 Data Setting Mode OFF(Group 0 G Code)

The G11 command cancels G10 Data Setting mode.

G12 Circular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion

- NOTE -G12 is used to program circular pocket milling if the machine is NOT equipped withthe tool probe option. Use M100, page 1-44, to program circular pocket milling ifthe machine is equipped with the tool probe option.

The G12 command allows the programmer to define a circular pocket with one data block.The tool will follow a clockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information on pocketmilling.

G13 Circular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion

- NOTE -G13 is used to program circular pocket milling if the machine is NOT equipped withthe tool probe option. Use M101, page 1-44, to program circular pocket milling ifthe machine is equipped with the tool probe option.

The G13 command allows the programmer to define a circular pocket with one data block.The tool will follow a counterclockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information onpocket milling.

G15 Polar Coordinate Programming OFF(Group 17 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The G15 command cancels polar coordinate programmingand activates rectangular coordinate programming. Refer to Chapter 4 for additional informationon rectangular and polar coordinate programming.

1-14 M-377B

Page 33: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G16 Polar Coordinate Programming ON(Group 17 G Code)

The G16 command cancels rectangular coordinate programming and activates polar coordi-nate programming. Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on rectangular and polar coordi-nate programming.

G17 XY Plane Selection(Group 2 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The G17 command selects the X,Y plane for tool compen-sation, circular interpolation, coordinate system rotation, and drilling cycles. G17 is modal andwill be effective until canceled by a G18 or G19 command. Refer to the appropriate chapter foradditional information on using the G17 command with tool compensation, circular interpolation,coordinate system rotation, or drilling cycles.

G18 XZ Plane Selection(Group 2 G Code)

The G18 command selects the X,Z plane for tool compensation, circular interpolation, coordi-nate system rotation, and drilling cycles. G18 is modal and will be effective until canceled by aG17 or G19 command. Refer to the appropriate chapter for additional information on using theG18 command with tool compensation, circular interpolation, coordinate system rotation, or drill-ing cycles.

G19 YZ Plane Selection(Group 2 G Code)

The G19 command selects the Y,Z plane for tool compensation, circular interpolation, coordi-nate system rotation, and drilling cycles. G19 is modal and will be effective until canceled by aG17 or G18 command. Refer to the appropriate chapter for additional information on using theG19 command with tool compensation, circular interpolation, coordinate system rotation, or drill-ing cycles.

G20 Inch Data Input(Group 6 G Code)

- NOTE -It is recommended that all programs written with inch dimensions have the G20code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in metric mode.

When G20 mode is active, all data is assumed to be inch data and is interpreted according tothe data word format table on page 1-2.

The command is modal and can be canceled only by a G21 (metric mode) command.Pressing the Reset key has no affect on G20. If G20 is active when power is turned OFF, It willbe active when power is restored. G20 must be programmed in a block by itself.

Refer to Chapter 12 for information on switching data input modes.

M-377B 1-15

Page 34: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G21 Metric Data Input(Group 6 G Code)

- NOTE -It is recommended that all programs written with metric dimensions have the G21code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in inch mode.

When G21 mode is active, all data is assumed to be metric data and is interpreted accordingto the data word format table on page 1-4.

The command is modal and can be canceled only by a G20 (inch mode) command. Pressingthe Reset key has no affect on G21. If G21 is active when power is turned OFF, It will be activewhen power is restored. G21 must be programmed in a block by itself.

Refer to Chapter 12 for information on switching data input modes.

G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON(Group 9 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. With G22 active, stored stroke limit #2 is active. The toolcannot enter the stroke limits established by these stored stroke limits.

- NOTE -Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G22 is active.

G22 is active at power-up regardless of whether it was active when the power was turnedOFF. However, a control reset will not return the control to G22 if G23 is active when the controlreset is performed.

G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF(Group 9 G Code)

With G23 active, stored stroke limit #2 is inactive. The tool is free to move within the rectan-gular areas established by these limits.

- NOTE -Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G23 is active.

G27 Reference Position Return Check(Group 0 G Code)

- CAUTION -Typically, this command is used for automatic tool changing. Tool compensa-tion should be canceled before executing this command.

The G27 command performs an automatic return to the reference (Home) position for one ormore axes. The move to reference position is performed at rapid traverse for each of the axescommanded. An alarm is issued by the machine control if the position reached by the com-manded axes is not the reference (Home) position.

1-16 M-377B

Page 35: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G28 Return to Reference Position(Group 0 G Code)

- CAUTION -Program “G28 G91 Z0.” to move the Z axis to the reference (Home) position. IfG90 is active and “G28 Z0.” is read by the machine control, the spindle willmove toward the surface of the machine table (Z0.).

The G28 command performs an automatic return to the reference (Home) position for one ormore axes. The move may be through an intermediate position or directly to the reference posi-tion. The move to the intermediate position or reference position is performed at rapid traversefor each of the axes commanded. Refer to G29 for returning from the reference position.

Coordinate values programmed in the G28 block are retained by the control and must be re-programmed if a different value is required. Refer to the following examples:

N1 G90 G28 X2. Y6. Z-10. ; Rapid to intermediate position X2, Y6, Z-10Then rapid to reference position

.

N2 G28 X4. ; Rapid to intermediate position X4Then rapid to reference position

G29 Return from Reference Position(Group 0 G Code)

The G29 command performs an automatic return from the reference (Home) position for oneor more axes. The move may be through an intermediate position or directly to the program co-ordinate. The move to the intermediate position or reference position is performed at rapid tra-verse for each of the axes commanded. Refer to G28 for returning to the reference position.

G30 Return to Tool Change Position(Group 0 G Code)

- CAUTION -Program “G30 G91 Z0.” to move the Z axis to the tool change position. If G90is active and “G30 Z0.” is read by the machine control, the spindle will movetoward the surface of the machine table (Z0.).

The G30 command is used to perform an automatic Z axis return to the tool change position.The G30 command also cancels the active tool offset.

G31 Skip Function(Group 0 G Code)

The G31 command allows the programmer to command linear interpolation (similar to G01)with the added capability of responding to an external skip signal.

If no skip signal is detected, program execution occurs as if G01 has been commanded.

If a skip signal is detected, program execution immediately moves to the next data block.The move currently being executed is not completed.

G31 is non-modal and must be programmed each time it is to be effective.

M-377B 1-17

Page 36: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G39 Corner Offset Circular Interpolation(Group 0 G Code)

The G39 command, in G01, G02, or G03 mode, permits executing offset circular interpolationwith a tool radius at a corner. This command is effective for X and Y axis moves only. G41 orG42 must already be active. G41 defines a clockwise arc and G42 defines a counterclockwisearc, when looking in the -Z direction.

G39 is a non-modal command and must be programmed each time it is to be effective. Thecurrently active mode (G01, G02, or G03) remains effective after the completion of the G39command block.

G39 X_ Y_ ;

In G90 mode, defines an absolute coordinate for the endpoint of the interpolated move.

In G91 mode, defines an incremental distance to the endpoint of the interpolated move.

or

G39 I_ J_ ;

Defines an incremental distance to the endpoint of the interpolated move.

G40 Tool Diameter Compensation Cancel(Group 7 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. Tool compensation (G41/G42) is canceled by a pro-grammed G40. If G40 is programmed in a block by itself, tool compensation is canceled. If theG40 block contains an axis move, tool compensation is canceled; then, the programmed moveoccurs without compensation. Compensation will be canceled when the Emergency Stop pushbutton or the Reset key is pressed. A Reference Home (Machine Home Operation) or a pro-grammed M02/M30 will also cancel tool compensation. Refer to Chapter 2 for additional informa-tion.

G41 Tool Diameter Compensation Active - Tool Left of Part(Group 7 G Code)

Tool diameter compensation with the tool to the left of the workpiece is established by pro-gramming G41. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool motion.If the workpiece is to the right of the operator, the correct code is G41. In the diameter compen-sation entry block, G41 should be programmed with a non-cutting positioning move in the samedata block. After diameter compensation has been entered, G41 may be programmed in a blockby itself to switch from G42 to G41. Refer to Chapter 2 for additional information.

G42 Tool Diameter Compensation Active - Tool Right of Part(Group 7 G Code)

Tool diameter compensation with the tool to the right of the workpiece is established by pro-gramming G42. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool motion.If the workpiece is to the left of the operator, the correct code is G42. In the diameter compen-sation entry block, G42 should be programmed with a non-cutting positioning move in the samedata block. After diameter compensation has been entered, G42 may be programmed in a blockby itself to switch from G41 to G42. Refer to Chapter 2 for additional information.

1-18 M-377B

Page 37: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G43 Tool Length Compensation Active(Group 8 Code)

Tool length compensation is established by programming G43 with an H word. The H wordspecifies the tool offset to be used. In the length compensation entry block, G43 must be pro-grammed with a non-cutting positioning move in the same data block.

Refer to Chapter 5 for additional information on tool length compensation.

G49 Tool Length Compensation Cancel(Group 8 Code)

Tool length compensation is canceled by programming G49. Refer to Chapter 5 for additionalinformation on tool length compensation.

G50 Scaling Mode OFF(Group 11 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The G50 command is used to cancel scaling mode.

G51 Scaling Mode ON(Group 11 G Code)

The G51 command is used to scale all axis motion from a specified position. A G50 com-mand, power OFF, or control reset will cancel a G51 command.

Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information on scaling mode.

G52 Local Coordinate System(Group 0 Code)

The G52 command is used to establish a local coordinate system within a standard coordi-nate system (G54 ~ G59). Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on establishing a localcoordinate system.

G54 ~ G59 Standard Work Coordinate Systems (G54 Default)(Group 14 G Codes)

The G54 through G59 commands allow the programmer to shift the axis zero positions.Through selection of the different coordinate systems, the programmer can use the same pro-gram to machine multiple parts. The values entered into each set of coordinate system registersrepresents the absolute distance from the machine reference (Home) position for each axis tothe shifted reference position for each axis.

G54 is the power-up or reset state and will remain effective until another coordinate system isselected.

When G55 through G59 is selected, it will remain effective until one of the following occur:

- Another coordinate system is selected

- The Reset key is pressed. (G54 will become active)

- The machine is powered down. (G54 will be active at power-up)

Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on programming and activating the standard co-ordinate systems.

M-377B 1-19

Page 38: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G54 P_ Additional Work Coordinate Systems(Group 14 G Code)

- NOTE -The Additional Work Coordinate System feature must be enabled through a param-eter before it can be used. Be aware that enabling this feature will consume 10meters of control memory.

When this feature is enabled, the “G54 P_” command allows the programmer to access 48additional work coordinate systems.

Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information on enabling and programming these additionalcoordinate systems.

G60 Single Direction Positioning(Group 0 G Code)

Single direction positioning (G60 command) allows the programmer to command the machinetool to approach all programmed positions from a specific direction (+ or -) on each axis. Usingsingle direction positioning effectively eliminates positioning errors that might otherwise resultfrom backlash in servo drive systems. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information on single di-rection positioning.

G61 Exact Stop Mode(Group 15 G Code)

When G61 is commanded, deceleration is performed at the end point of the cutting block andan “in position” check is performed for every subsequent block executed.

G61 remains active until canceled by a G62, G63, or G64 command. Refer to G09 for infor-mation on programming a non-modal exact stop.

1-20 M-377B

Page 39: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G62 Automatic Corner Override(Group 15 G Code)

- NOTE -The Automatic Corner Override feature must be enabled through a parameter be-fore it can be used.

G62 must be activated and deactivated from the part program during corner ma-chining when linear interpolation is active.

G62 is automatically activated and deactivated by the machine control as neededduring corner machining when circular interpolation is active if the following condi-tions are met:

- Tool diameter compensation is active; (G41 or G42) and a D word- Control interprets the move as an inside corner

The G62 command is used to automatically override the programmed feedrate at corners.

The purpose of the G62 Automatic Corner Override mode is to reduce tool velocity while cut-ting at corners. When a tool machines an inside corner at full feedrate, the tool may becomeoverloaded, resulting in a poor surface finish. When G62 is active, corner rounding is performedand the tool feedrate is reduced during the corner cut. The tool feedrate is returned to the pro-grammed feedrate after corner machining has been completed.

When activated from a program, G62 remains active until canceled by a G61, G63, or G64command.

G63 Tapping Mode(Group 15 G Code)

The G63 command is used to disable the feedrate override and feed hold functions. Thefeedrate does not decelerate at the end of the data block before execution of the next datablock.

G63 remains active until canceled by a G61, G62, or G64 command.

G64 Cutting Mode(Group 15 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The G64 command is used to establish standard cuttingmode. G64 Cutting mode employs corner rounding, but unlike G62 Automatic Corner Overridemode, performs all cutting moves at the programmed feedrate. This may result in poor surfacefinishes while cutting inside corners.

G64 remains active until canceled by a G61, G62, or G63 command.

M-377B 1-21

Page 40: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G65 Non-Modal Macro Program Call(Group 0 G Code)

To activate a non-modal macro, program the following macro call command:

G65 P______ L______ ;

Where: G65 = Macro Call CommandP = Macro Program NumberL = Number of times to be executed

L is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

The G65 macro call command is non-modal. After the G65 command block is executed, G65mode is deactivated. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information on calling macro programs.

G66 Modal Macro Program Call(Group 12 G Code)

To activate a modal macro, program the following macro call command:

G66 P______ L______ ;

Where: G66 = Macro Call CommandP = Macro Program NumberL = Number of times to be executed

L is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed.

The specified macro call instruction is executed every time a motion command is executed.

The G66 macro call command is modal and stays effective until canceled by the G67 com-mand. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information on calling macro programs.

G67 Modal Macro Program Call Cancel(Group 12 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. G67 cancels the modal macro mode activated by the G66command.

1-22 M-377B

Page 41: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G68 Coordinate Rotation(Group 16 G Code)

The G68 command is used to rotate a coordinate system. Three types of information are pro-grammed to allow the control to perform the coordinate system rotation:

- Plane of Rotation

- Center Point for Rotation

- Angle of Rotation

PLANE OF ROTATION

G17 (X,Y Axis) - Center point will be defined with X and Y coordinates.

G18 (X,Z Axis) - Center point will be defined with X and Z coordinates.

G19 (Y,Z Axis) - Center point will be defined with Y and Z coordinates.

If the desired plane of rotation is already active, it is not necessary to program the G17,G18, or G19 command in the G68 data block.

CENTER POINT FOR ROTATION (XY, XZ, or YZ Coordinate)

When G90 (Absolute mode) is active, the coordinate values programmed will be in rela-tion to the machine reference (Home) position, unless modified by a work coordinate systemcommand (G54 through G59). The center point for rotation will be shifted according to theactive work coordinate system shift.

When G91 (Incremental mode) is active, the coordinate values programmed will be in re-lation to the current axis position.

If a coordinate is not specified for center of rotation, the current axis position is used forcenter of rotation.

ANGLE OF ROTATION ® Word)

The valid range for angle definition is -360.000 to +360.000, in .001 degree increments.The value is retained by the machine control. If G68 Coordinate Rotation is commandedwithout an R word, the last rotation angle that was programmed will be used.

PROGRAM BLOCK STRUCTURE

G(17, 18, or 19) G68 1st Axis_ 2nd Axis_ R_ ;

SAMPLE PROGRAM BLOCKS

G17 G68 X_ Y_ R_ ;

G18 G68 X_ Z_ R_ ;

G19 G68 Y_ Z_ R_ ;

G69 Coordinate Rotation Cancel(Group 16 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The G69 command cancels the G68 Coordinate Rotationcommand. The machine coordinate system reverts to standard orientation.

M-377B 1-23

Page 42: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G71 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion

- NOTE -G71 is used to program rectangular pocket milling if the machine is NOT equippedwith the tool probe option. Use M102, page 1-45, to program rectangular pocketmilling if the machine is equipped with the tool probe option.

The G71 command allows the programmer to define a square or rectangular pocket with onedata block. The tool will follow a clockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information onpocket milling.

G72 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion

- NOTE -G72 is used to program rectangular pocket milling if the machine is NOT equippedwith the tool probe option. Use M103, page 1-45, to program rectangular pocketmilling if the machine is equipped with the tool probe option.

The G72 command allows the programmer to define a square or rectangular pocket with onedata block. The tool will follow a counterclockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional infor-mation on pocket milling.

G73 High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G73 command activates a high speed peck drilling cycle that uses constant depth incre-ments. When the last drill pass is completed, the tool will retract to either the start point of thedrilling cycle or a return point specified by the R word, depending on whether G98 or G99 is ac-tive. The retract move will be performed at rapid traverse rate. The G73 cycle is programmed inone data block. G73 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 G code. Refer toChapter 8 for additional information.

G74 Left-Hand Tapping Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G74 command activates a left-hand tapping cycle. When the tapping is completed, thespindle will reverse direction and the tap will feed back to the R point and rapid to the start pointof the tapping cycle if G98 is active or the tap will feed to the R point and remain there if G99 isactive. The G74 cycle is programmed in one data block. G74 remains effective until canceled byanother Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 10 for additional information.

G76 Fine Boring Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G76 command activates a fine boring cycle. After the boring pass is completed, tool rota-tion stops and the tool is moved away from the machined surface before the tool is retractedfrom the bore to prevent damage to the workpiece. The tool will retract to either the start point ofthe boring cycle or a return point specified by the R word, depending on whether G98 or G99 isactive. The retract move will be performed at rapid traverse rate. The G76 cycle is programmedin one data block. G76 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 G code. Refer toChapter 9 for additional information.

1-24 M-377B

Page 43: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G80 Cycle Cancel(Group 9 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The G80 command cancels machining cycles G73, G74,G76, and G81 through G89. Data programmed for cycle return position R command) and depthof cut (Z command) is canceled. Refer to the machining cycle examples in Chapters 8, 9, and10 for additional information.

G81 Drilling Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G81 command activates a single pass drilling cycle. When the drilling pass is completed,the tool will continue to rotate while retracting to either the start point of the drilling cycle or a re-turn point specified by the R word, depending on whether G98 or G99 is active. The retractmove will be performed at rapid traverse rate. The G81 cycle is programmed in one data block.G81 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 8 for addi-tional information.

G82 Drilling Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G82 command activates a single pass drilling cycle with a programmable dwell at theend of the drilling pass. When the drilling pass is completed, the tool will continue to rotate whilebeing retracted at rapid traverse rate after the specified dwell. The tool will retract to either thestart point of the drilling cycle or a return point specified by the R word, depending on whetherG98 or G99 is active. The retract move will be performed at rapid traverse rate. The G82 cycleis programmed in one data block. G82 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 Gcode. Refer to Chapter 8 for additional information.

G83 Peck Drilling Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G83 command activates a peck drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments. Whenthe last drill pass is completed, the tool will retract to either the start point of the drilling cycle ora return point specified by the R word, depending on whether G98 or G99 is active. The retractmove will be performed at rapid traverse rate. The G83 cycle is programmed in one data block.G83 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 8 for addi-tional information.

G84 Right-Hand Tapping Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G84 command activates a right-hand tapping cycle. When the tapping is completed, thespindle will reverse direction and the tap will feed back to the R point and rapid to the start pointof the tapping cycle if G98 is active or the tap will feed to the R point and remain there if G99 isactive. The G84 cycle is programmed in one data block. G84 remains effective until canceled byanother Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 10 for additional information.

M-377B 1-25

Page 44: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G85 Boring Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G85 command activates a boring cycle. After the boring tool reaches the programmeddepth, the tool will continue to rotate and retract at the programmed feedrate to the return pointspecified by the R word. The tool will remain at the return point if G99 is active or the tool willrapid to the start point of the boring cycle if G98 is active. The G85 cycle is programmed in onedata block. G85 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 9for additional information.

G86 Boring Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G86 command activates a single pass boring cycle. When the boring pass is completed,tool rotation will stop and the tool will be retracted at rapid traverse rate to either the start pointof the drilling cycle or a return point specified by the R word, depending on whether G98 or G99is active. The G86 cycle is programmed in one data block. G86 remains effective until canceledby another Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information.

G87 Back Boring Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

- NOTE -G99 is not effective with the G87 Back Boring Cycle.

The G87 command activates a back boring cycle. This cycle allows boring on back surfaces,with the tool moving in the +Z direction during the boring operation. After the boring pass iscompleted, tool rotation stops and the tool is moved away from the machined surface before thetool is retracted. The tool will be retracted at rapid traverse rate to the start point of the boringcycle. The G87 cycle is programmed in one data block. G87 remains effective until canceled byanother Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information.

G88 Boring Cycle (with Manual Retract)(Group 9 G Code)

The G88 command activates a boring cycle with a programmable dwell at the end of the bor-ing pass. When the boring pass reaches the programmed end point, tool rotation will stop. Themachine operator will manually retract the tool will to the return point specified by the R word.The retract move from the return point to the start point of the cycle will be performed at rapidtraverse rate. The G88 cycle is programmed in one data block. G88 remains effective until can-celed by another Group 9 G code. Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information.

G89 Boring Cycle(Group 9 G Code)

The G89 command activates a boring cycle. After the boring tool reaches the programmeddepth, the tool will dwell at the end of the bore and the spindle will continue to rotate. After thedwell is completed, the tool will continue to rotate and retract at the programmed feedrate to thereturn point specified by the R word. The tool will remain at the return point if G99 is active orthe tool will rapid to the start point of the boring cycle if G98 is active. The G89 cycle is pro-grammed in one data block. G89 remains effective until canceled by another Group 9 G code.Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information.

1-26 M-377B

Page 45: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G90 Absolute Positioning Mode(Group 3 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. G90 commands all axis motion to be performed in relationto the reference (Home) position, unless modified by a work coordinate system command (G54through G59). The reference position will be shifted according to the active work coordinate sys-tem shift. Refer to the descriptions for the X, Y, and Z data words, beginning on page 1-29.

G91 Incremental Positioning Mode(Group 3 G Code)

G91 commands all axis motion to be performed in relation to the current axis position. Referto the descriptions for the X, Y, and Z data words, beginning on page 1-29.

G92 Coordinate Shift / Constant Surface Speed RPM Limit(Group 0 G Code)

COORDINATE SHIFT

The G92 command allows the machine absolute coordinate system to be shifted, as needed.Typically the machine axes are moved to a specific position; then, G92 and the desired coordi-nates are commanded. The Absolute position registers are reset to the coordinates commandedin the G92 data block.

Refer to Chapter 4 for additional information.

CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED RPM LIMIT

The G92 command is used with Constant Surface Speed to establish a spindle rpm limit. Thefollowing example establishes a spindle speed limit of 4500 rpm.

Example: G92 S4500 ;

A Zero Return operation, power OFF, or a control reset will cancel a G92 rpm limit.

Refer to Chapter 12 for more information on Constant Surface Speed.

G94 Inches / Millimeter Per Minute Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly ininches/mm per minute. The feedrate remains unchanged until reprogrammed. The F word formatis F3.2 in inch mode (G20) and F5.0 in metric mode (G21). The maximum programmable feed-rate is 472 in/min [12,000 mm/min]. When entering G98 mode, a new feedrate should be pro-grammed. G98 is modal and cancels G99.

The decimal point must be programmed. The following examples are written for inch mode(G20):

Example 1: F400 results in a feedrate of 4 inches per minute.

Example 2: F400. results in a feedrate of 400 inches per minute.

M-377B 1-27

Page 46: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G95 Inches / Millimeter Per Revolution Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)

The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in inches/mm per revolution. The feedrate re-mains unchanged until reprogrammed. The F word format is F1.6 in inch mode (G20) and F3.4in metric mode (G21). The maximum programmable feedrate is 9.999999 ipr [500.0000 mm/rev].When entering G99 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G99 is modal and cancelsG98.

The decimal point must be programmed. The following examples are written for inch mode(G20):

Example 1: F9 results in a feedrate of .000009 inches per revolution.

Example 2: F9. results in a feedrate of 9 inches per revolution.

G96 Constant Surface Speed(Group 13 G Code)

G96 mode allows programming the speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece directly insurface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metric mode(G21). Constant Surface Speed is a function of the spindle speed range and the programmedconstant surface speed (S word). The control automatically adjusts the spindle speed within itsrange to maintain the constant surface speed regardless of the position of the tool. G96 is can-celed by G97. If a new spindle speed is not programmed, the spindle will remain at the speedthat was active when Constant Surface Speed was canceled.

Refer to Chapter 12 for more information on Constant Surface Speed.

G97 Direct RPM Programming(Group 13 G Code)

This is the default state of the control and need not be programmed. Spindle speeds are pro-grammed directly in revolutions per minute. If a different spindle speed is desired, an S wordspecifying the new spindle speed will be programmed. Refer to S Word, on page 1-36.

G98 Return to Initial Point in Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

This is the power-up or reset state. G98 mode commands the tool to return to the start posi-tion of the cycle (initial point) when the cycle is completed. The return move is performed atrapid traverse rate. G98 is canceled by G99. Refer to Chapters 8, 9, and 10 for more informa-tion on machining cycles.

G99 Return to R Point in Cycle(Group 10 G Code)

G99 mode commands the tool to move to a return point (R point) specified by the R dataword in the block commanding the machining cycle when the cycle is completed. The returnmove is performed at rapid traverse rate. G99 is canceled by G98. Refer to Chapters 8, 9, and10 for more information on machining cycles.

1-28 M-377B

Page 47: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

X WORD

- CAUTION -Programming an axis to move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offsetactive could cause the tool to strike the workpiece.

- NOTE -Although the axis drive system actually moves the machine table, for purposes ofclarity all X axis motion will be discussed in terms tool movement in relation to astationary table.

The X word is an axis position command. X axis motion is to the left or right, as viewed fromthe front of the machine. It is measured between the X Home position and the spindle centerlineand is written with an X followed by a plus or minus sign. The plus sign may be omitted becausethe control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

The spindle is at the X axis Home Position when it is aligned with the X axis reference loca-tion. Refer to the Appendix for the X axis Home position and the maximum travel between the+X and -X software limits.

Only one X command should be programmed in a data block. If more than one X command isprogrammed in a data block, the control will act on the X command programmed closest to theEnd of Block character. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4.

Absolute PositioningG90 activates absolute positioning mode. With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero

offset) active, all programmed motions will be the final position of the spindle centerline in rela-tion to the X axis reference position. When X axis tool and wear offsets are activated by an off-set command (T word), the programmed position will be modified according to the offset.

Assuming tool offsets are inactive, X is positive when the spindle centerline is positioned tothe right of the X axis reference point. X is negative when the spindle centerline is positioned tothe left of the X axis reference point.

Example: A command of “X2.5" will cause the control to align the spindle with X axis coor-dinate 2.5 .

A work shift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which X0 doesnot coincide with the X axis Home position. In this case, all programmed X axis motions will berelative to the X0 established by the work shift. Refer to Chapter 4 for information regardingwork shift.

Incremental PositioningG91 activates incremental positioning mode. All incremental X axis moves are performed in

relation to the current X axis position.

Example: A command of X2.5 will cause the control to position the spindle 2.5 inches in the+X direction from the previous position on the X axis. Refer to Figure 1.1 .

Dwell CommandThe X word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The X word for-

mat in a G04 command is X5.3, in seconds. Refer to G04 Dwell, page 1-13.

M-377B 1-29

Page 48: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Y WORD

- CAUTION -Programming an axis to move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offsetactive could cause the tool to strike the workpiece.

- NOTE -Although the axis drive system actually moves the machine table, for purposes ofclarity all Y axis motion will be discussed in terms tool movement in relation to astationary table.

The Y word is an absolute axis position command. Y axis motion is toward the front or backof the machine. It is measured between the Y Home position and the spindle centerline and iswritten with an Y followed by a plus or minus sign. The plus sign may be omitted because thecontrol assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

The spindle is at the Y axis Home Position when it is aligned with the Y axis reference loca-tion. Refer to the Appendix for the Y axis Home position and the maximum travel between the+Y and -Y software limits.

Only one Y command should be programmed in a data block. If more than one Y command isprogrammed in a data block, the control will act on the Y command programmed closest to theEnd of Block character. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4.

Absolute PositioningAssuming tool offsets are inactive, Y is positive when the spindle centerline is positioned to

the right of the Y axis reference point. Y is negative when the spindle centerline is positioned tothe left of the Y axis reference point.

With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed motions willbe the final position of the spindle centerline in relation to the Y axis reference position. When Xaxis tool and wear offsets are activated by an offset command (T word), the programmed posi-tion will be modified according to the offset.

Example: A command of “Y2.5" will cause the control to align the spindle with Y axis coor-dinate 2.5 .

A work shift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which X0 doesnot coincide with the X axis Home position. In this case, all programmed X axis motions will berelative to the X0 established by the work shift. Refer to Chapter 4 for information regardingwork shift.

1-30 M-377B

Page 49: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Incremental PositioningG91 activates incremental positioning mode. All incremental Y axis moves are performed in

relation to the current Y axis position.

Example: A command of “G91 Y2.5” will cause the control to position the table 2.5 inchesin the +Y direction from the previous position on the Y axis. Refer to Figure 1.1 .

M-377B 1-31

Figure 1.1 - X and Y Axis Table Movement(Viewed from Top of Machine)

+X Motion -X Motion

-Y Motion

+Y Motion TI4061

Front of Machine

Page 50: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Z WORD

The Z word is a distance command for the spindle. It is measured relative to the spindleHome position and is written with a Z followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus sign maybe omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.

The spindle is in Home Position when the face of the spindle is located 23.6220 inches[600.000 mm] from the table. Refer to the Appendix for the Z axis Home position and the maxi-mum travel between the +Z and -Z software limits.

Only one Z command should be programmed in a data block. If more than one Z command isprogrammed in a data block, the control will act on the Z command programmed closest to theEnd of Block character.

- CAUTION -Programming an axis to move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offsetactive could cause the tool to strike the spindle or workpiece.

The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4.

Absolute PositioningG90 activates absolute positioning mode. With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero

offset) active, all programmed Z axis movements will be the final position of the spindle face inrelation to the spindle Home position. When a tool offset and/or a work shift (zero offset) are ac-tive, the programmed position will be modified accordingly.

Example: A command of “Z5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the spindleface 5 inches above the table. A command of “Z9.” with a feedrate will cause thecontrol to position the spindle face 9 inches above the table.

A work shift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which Z0 doesnot coincide with the spindle Home position. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not thespindle Home position, all programmed Z axis movements will be relative to the Z0 establishedby the work shift. A positive Z value describes a coordinate point below the spindle Home posi-tion. A negative Z value describes a coordinate point above the spindle Home position. Refer toChapter 4 for information regarding work shift.

Incremental PositioningG91 activates incremental positioning mode. All

incremental Z axis moves are performed in rela-tion to the current Z axis position.

Example: A command of Z2.5 will cause thecontrol to position the spindle 2.5inches in the +Z direction from theprevious position on the Z axis. Re-fer to Figure 1.2 .

1-32 M-377B

Figure 1.2 - Z Axis Motion

MachineSpindle

MachineTable

+Z

-Z

TI4062

Page 51: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

I WORD

The I word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The I word is a signed value de-fining the distance on the X axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a re-sult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center. The data word format isshown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4. Refer to Circular Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

J WORD

The J word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The J word is a signed value de-fining the distance on the Y axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a re-sult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center. The data word format isshown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4. Refer to Circular Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

K WORD

The K word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The K word is a signed value de-fining the distance on the Z axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a re-sult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center. The data word format isshown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4. Refer to Circular Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

C WORD

When Linear Interpolation (G01) is active, “,C” defines the numerical value of a chamfer in-serted between two linear moves. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2and 1-4. Refer to Linear Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

R WORD

When Linear Interpolation (G01) is active, “,R” defines the numerical value of a radius in-serted between two linear moves. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2and 1-4. Refer to Linear Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

When Circular Interpolation (G02 or G03) is active, “R” defines the numerical value of a ra-dius connecting two points. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4.Refer to Circular Interpolation, in Chapter 3.

When Tool Compensation (G41 or G42) is active, “R” defines the numerical value of the toolnose radius. Values are stored in the Tool Offset Tables and are activated by a T command.The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4. Refer to “Chapter 2 - ToolCompensation”.

When Coordinate Rotation (G68) is active, R defines the direction and amount of rotation ofthe coordinate system. Refer to G68 Coordinate Rotation, page 1-19, for additional information.

M-377B 1-33

Page 52: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

P WORD

The P word is used in the following functions:

G82 Drilling Cycle, in Chapter 8G88 Boring Cycle, in Chapter 9G89 Boring Cycle, in Chapter 9Subprogram Calling, in Chapter 12Program Entry of Tool Offsets, in Chapter 5

When used with G04, G82, G88, and G89 commands, the P word is used to establish a timefactor for a dwell. The P word expresses dwell in ten-thousands of a second and has the dataword format P8. Refer to G04 Dwell, page 1-13.

- NOTE -Decimal Point programming cannot be used with the P word. Leading zero sup-pression may be used, but trailing zeros must be used.

When used with subprogram calling, the P word appears in the M98 calling block of the mainpart program and specifies the I.D. number of the subprogram to be called and the number oftimes the subprogram is to be executed. The data word format is P7.

When used with tape entry of tool offsets or Work shift offsets, the P word specifies the offsetnumber. It has the data word format P5.

Refer to Chapter 5 for information on storing tool offsets in memory.

Q WORD

The Q word is used in the G73/G83 peck drilling cycles and the G76/G87 boring cycles. TheQ word is used to specify the depth of cut for each pass during a G73 or G83 peck drilling cycleand is programmed as a positive incremental value. Refer to Chapter 8 for additional informationon the peck drilling cycles.

The Q word is used to specify the shift value during a G76 or G87 boring cycle and is pro-grammed as a positive incremental value. Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on theboring cycles.

D WORD

The D word is used to select the tool diameter offset. The tool diameter offset is activatedthrough the use of the G41 or G42 command. The data word format is shown in the tables onpages 1-2 and 1-4.

“D00" cancels the active tool diameter offset. ”D01" through “D200" activates the correspond-ing tool diameter offset.

Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Tool Offsets” for additional information.

1-34 M-377B

Page 53: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

H WORD

The H word is used to select the tool length offset. The tool length offset is activated throughthe use of the G43 command. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and1-4.

“H00" cancels the active tool length offset. ”H01" through “H200" activates the correspondingtool length offset.

Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Tool Offsets” for additional information.

F WORD

The F word is used to establish a feedrate. When used with the G94 command, it expressesthe feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute. The word format is F3.2 for inch mode (G20)and F5.0 for metric mode (G21). The decimal point must be programmed.

When used with the G95 command, it expresses the feedrate in inches or millimeters per rev-olution. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4. The decimal pointmust be programmed.

If more than one feedrate is programmed in a data block, the last feedrate programmed willbe the active feedrate.

Since the maximum programmable feedrate is 472 ipm [12,000 mm/min] on the X, Y, and Zaxes, the feedrate in G95 mode is “Lead Limited”. When G95 mode is active, the maximumfeedrate in G01 mode is derived from the following formulas:

Maximum Feedrate (ipr) = 472 inches per minute ÷ RPMMaximum Feedrate (mm/rev) = 12,000 mm per minute ÷ RPM

The F word, which can be placed anywhere in the data block, remains unchanged until repro-grammed. The rapid traverse rate is obtained by programming maximum feedrate when the con-trol is operating in G94 mode. In G95 mode, rapid traverse is obtained by calculating thefeedrate from the preceding formulas. If G00 is used to obtain the rapid traverse rate, be sure itis canceled by another Group 1 G code after the rapid traverse move is completed.

The Feedrate Override switch modifies the programmed feedrate from 0% (Feed Hold) to200%. When Dry Run mode is active, the control causes all slide motion to take place at 40inches per minute when the Feedrate Override switch is set to 100%.

M-377B 1-35

Page 54: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

S WORD

The S word is used to establish spindle speed. The S word is modal; and, once programmed,need not be programmed again until a different spindle speed is required. Do not program adecimal point with the S word.

The data word format is shown in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-4. The effective spindlespeed range is shown in the table below.

Spindle Type Base RPM Maximum RPM

Standard Spindle 2,000 8,000

High Torque Spindle, Low Range [Option] 375 1,375

High Torque Spindle, High Range [Option] 2,000 8,000

High Speed Spindle [Option] 1,333 12,000 or 15,000

T WORD

The T word indexes the tool conveyor. The data word format is shown in the tables on pages1-2 and 1-4. The two digits specify the tool to be moved to the tool change position.

Example: N0120 T15 ;

Block N0120 calls for tool 15 to be moved to the tool change position.

1-36 M-377B

Page 55: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M WORD

The M words convey action to the machine. They are known as miscellaneous functions andare designated by a programmed M word having the format M3.

Only one M word is allowed in a data block. If more than one M word is programmed in ablock from the keyboard or tape, the last M word entered will be the active M word. Refer to theM word chart in the Appendix.

The M word may be placed anywhere in the data block.

The following M words have been assigned to Hardinge Series II VMC Machining Centersequipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc Control System II:

M00 Program StopThe M00 command stops the program, the spindle, and turns the coolant off. Pressing the

Cycle Start push button causes the program to continue. It is the programmers responsibility toprogram an M03, M04, M07, M08, M13, M14, or M15 to restart the spindle and coolant pumpwhen restarting the program after an M00 Program Stop.

M01 Optional StopThe M01 command performs the same function as M00 if Optional Stop has been activated

before the block containing the M01 is read by the control. If Optional Stop is not activated bythe operator, the control will ignore the programmed M01 and will continue to execute the pro-gram. This function is useful when it is necessary to gauge the workpiece during setup. Pressingthe Cycle Start push button causes the program to continue. It is the programmers responsibilityto program an M03, M04, M07, M08, M13, M14, or M15 to restart the spindle and coolant pumpwhen restarting the program after an M01 Optional Stop.

M02 End of ProgramM02 indicates the end of a part program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It

stops the spindle, turns the coolant OFF, and “rewinds” the part program. Refer also to M30.

M03 Spindle ForwardThe M03 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwiseas viewed in the -Z direction. M03 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05,M14, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M04 Spindle ReverseThe M04 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counter-clockwise as viewed in the -Z direction. M04 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02,M03, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M-377B 1-37

Page 56: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M05 Spindle StopThe M05 command causes the spindle to stop, but DOES NOT stop axis motion unless G95

is active. M05 remains active until canceled by M03, M04, M13, or M14. M05 can also be acti-vated by M00, M01, M02, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M06 Automatic Tool ChangeThe M06 command causes the tool in the spindle to be exchanged with the tool in the active

position of the tool conveyor. The desired tool will have been previously indexed to the activeposition through the use of a T word.

M08 Coolant Pump ONM08 turns the coolant pump ON. M08 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M05,

M09, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M09 Coolant Pump OFFM09 turns the coolant pump OFF and remains active until canceled by M08, M13, or M14.

M09 is active at machine start-up and is activated by M00, M01, M02, M05, M30, or by pressingthe Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

M10 Rotary Table Brake ON [Option]M10 turns the rotary table brake ON. The brake prevents the rotary table from turning during

the machining process. M10 is canceled by M11.

M11 Rotary Table Brake OFF [Option]M11 turns the rotary table brake OFF, allowing the rotary table to index between cuts. M11 is

canceled by M10.

M13 Spindle Forward / Coolant ONThe M13 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. All available coolant delivery systemson the machine will be activated. The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotatingclockwise as viewed from the top of the machine. M13 remains active until canceled by M00,M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.

If M04 is programmed after M13, the spindle will run in the reverse direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.

1-38 M-377B

Page 57: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M14 Spindle Reverse / Coolant ONThe M14 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed

spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. All available coolant delivery systemson the machine will be activated. The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotatingcounterclockwise as viewed from the top of the machine. M14 remains active until canceled byM00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop pushbutton.

If M03 is programmed after M14, the spindle will run in the forward direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.

M15 Spindle Stop / Coolant OFFThe M05 command causes the spindle to stop and turns the coolant OFF, but DOES NOT

stop axis motion unless G95 is active. M05 remains active until canceled by M03, M04, M13, orM14. M05 can also be activated by M00, M01, M02, M30, or by pressing the Reset key orEmergency Stop push button.

M16 Air Blast OFF

- NOTE -The M16 command is incorporated in the tool change macro program and is NOTintended for direct programming.

The M16 command deactivates the spindle air purge feature.

M17 Air Blast ON

- NOTE -The M17 command is incorporated in the tool change macro program and is NOTintended for direct programming.

The M17 command deactivates the spindle air purge feature. The spindle air purge feature isintended to clear the spindle of chips and other contaminants during each tool change. M17 iscanceled by an M16 command.

M19 Spindle OrientThe M19 command causes radial orientation of the machine spindle for the purpose of align-

ing the drive lugs on the machine spindle to the tool change position. The spindle is clamped inthe tool change position. M19 is canceled by an M20 command.

Refer to Chapter 5 for more information on tool change.

M20 Spindle Orient CancelThe M20 command releases the spindle for normal operation. M20 cancels the M19 com-

mand.

M-377B 1-39

Page 58: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M21 X Axis Mirror Image ONThe M21 command turns X axis mirror imaging ON. Refer to Chapter 12 for information on

the mirror image function. M21 is canceled by an M23 command.

M22 Y Axis Mirror Image ONThe M23 command turns Y axis mirror imaging ON. Refer to Chapter 12 for information on

the mirror image function. M22 is canceled by an M23 command.

M23 Mirror Image CancelThe M23 command cancels X axis mirror imaging (M21) or Y axis mirror imaging (M22).

M24 Work Light ONThe M24 command turns the work light ON.

M25 Work Light OFFThe M25 command turns the work light OFF.

M29 Rigid Tapping ModeThe M29 command activates rigid tapping mode. Refer to Chapter 10 for information on rigid

tapping.

M30 End of ProgramM30 indicates the end of a program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It

stops the spindle, turns the coolant OFF, and “rewinds” the part program. Refer also to M02.

M41 Spindle Low Gear (High Torque Machine Only)

- NOTE -Spindle gear changes (M41/M42) should only be programmed while at tool changeposition.

The M41 command switches the two-speed spindle to low gear, which provides higher torque.The effective spindle speed range for machining in low gear is 375 to 1375 rpm.

M42 Spindle High Gear (High Torque Machine Only)

- NOTE -Spindle gear changes (M41/M42) should only be programmed while at tool changeposition.

The M42 command switches the two-speed spindle to high gear. The effective spindle speedrange for machining in high gear is 2000 to 8000 rpm.

M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle OverrideM48 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the use of the feedrate and

spindle override features. M48 remains active until canceled by M49.

M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle OverrideM49 cancels M48 and causes the feedrates and spindle speeds to operate at 100% of the

programmed values, ignoring the feedrate and spindle override controls. M49 remains active un-til canceled by an M02, M30, M48, a control OFF, or a control Reset.

1-40 M-377B

Page 59: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M51 Chip Coolant ONThe M51 command turns the lower chip flush ON. The chip flush nozzles are located toward

the back of the machine work envelope and direct coolant toward the front of the machine towash chips into the chip pans. M51 is canceled by an M52 command.

M52 Chip Coolant OFFThe M52 command turns the lower chip flush OFF. M51 cancels an M52 command.

M53 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON [Option]The M53 command activates the valve that directs coolant flow through the machine spindle

in flood mode (constant flow). M53 remains active until canceled by M54. The main coolantpump must be turned ON through the use of M08, M13, M14, or the Coolant ON push buttonbefore coolant will flow through the spindle.

M54 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF [Option]The M54 command deactivates the valve that directs coolant flow through the machine spin-

dle. Coolant flow through the spindle will stop. The coolant pump will continue to operate untilturned OFF through the use of M00, M01, M02, M09, M15, M30, Coolant OFF push button, Re-set key, or Emergency Stop push button.

M68 Chip Conveyor ONThe M68 command turns the optional chip conveyor ON. M68 is canceled by an M69 com-

mand or by pressing the Chip Conveyor ON/OFF push button.

M69 Chip Conveyor OFFThe M69 command turns the optional chip conveyor OFF. M69 is canceled by an M68 com-

mand or by pressing the Chip Conveyor ON/OFF push button.

M71 Tool Magazine 1 HomeThe M71 command causes the standard tool magazine to move away from the machine spin-

dle, to the “Home” position. This is the standard position for the tool magazine during machining.Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M71. This command is incorpo-rated in the tool change macro program. M71 is canceled by an M72 command.

M72 Tool Magazine 1 Extend

- CAUTION -Failure to command an M71 to move the tool magazine to the “Home” positionbefore machining a workpiece could result in damage to the machine or tool-ing.

The M72 command causes the standard tool magazine to move toward the machine spindle,to the “Tool Change” position. Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M72.This command is incorporated in the tool change macro program. M72 is canceled by an M71command.

M73 Tool Magazine 1 Spindle Tool ClampThe M73 command causes the spindle to clamp the tool holder supplied from the first tool

magazine. Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M73. This command isincorporated in the tool change macro program. M73 is canceled by an M74 command.

M-377B 1-41

Page 60: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M74 Tool Magazine 1 Spindle Tool UnclampThe M74 command causes the spindle to release the tool holder to be returned to the first

tool magazine. Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M74. This commandis incorporated in the tool change macro program. M74 is canceled by an M73 command.

M75 Search Spindle Tool Number (Magazine 1)The M75 command compares the number of the tool in the spindle with the tool station at the

tool change position on the standard tool magazine. If the correct tool station is not at the toolchange position, the tool magazine will index to position the correct tool station at the toolchange position.

Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to program an M75. The M75 command is incor-porated in the tool change macro program.

M76 Activate Tool Change Mode (Magazine 1)The M76 command activates tool change mode for tool magazine 1. Under normal conditions,

it is not necessary to program an M76. The M76 command is incorporated in the tool changemacro program. M76 is canceled by an M77 command.

When necessary, the M76 command is programmed by the machine operator when recover-ing from a tool changer fault. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on the FaultRecovery Procedures.

M77 Cancel Tool Change Mode (Magazine 1)The M77 command deactivates tool change mode for tool magazine 1. Under normal condi-

tions, it is not necessary to program an M77. The M77 command is incorporated in the toolchange macro program. M77 is canceled by an M76 command.

When necessary, the M77 command is programmed by the machine operator when recover-ing from a tool changer fault. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on the FaultRecovery Procedures.

M80 Automatic Power OFF ActiveThe M80 command will automatically turn the machine control OFF.

M81 Tool Magazine 2 Home [Option]The M81 command causes the second tool magazine to move away from the machine spin-

dle, to the “Home” position. This is the standard position for the tool magazine during machining.Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M81. This command is incorpo-rated in the tool change macro program. M81 is canceled by an M82 command.

1-42 M-377B

Page 61: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M82 Tool Magazine 2 Extend [Option]

- CAUTION -Failure to command an M81 to move the second tool magazine to the “Home”position before machining a workpiece could result in damage to the machineor tooling.

The M82 command causes the second tool magazine to move toward the machine spindle, tothe “Tool Change” position. Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M82.This command is incorporated in the tool change macro program. M82 is canceled by an M81command.

M83 Tool Magazine 2 Spindle Tool Clamp [Option]The M83 command causes the spindle to clamp the tool holder supplied from the second tool

magazine. Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M83. This command isincorporated in the tool change macro program. M83 is canceled by an M84 command.

M84 Tool Magazine 2 Spindle Tool Unclamp [Option]The M84 command causes the spindle to release the tool holder to be returned to the second

tool magazine. Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to command an M84. This commandis incorporated in the tool change macro program. M84 is canceled by an M83 command.

M85 Search Spindle Tool Number (Magazine 2)The M85 command compares the number of the tool in the spindle with the tool station at the

tool change position on the optional second tool magazine. If the correct tool station is not at thetool change position, the tool magazine will index to position the correct tool station at the toolchange position.

Under normal conditions, it is not necessary to program an M85. The M85 command is incor-porated in the tool change macro program.

M86 Activate Tool Change Mode (Magazine 2)The M86 command activates tool change mode for tool magazine 2. Under normal conditions,

it is not necessary to program an M86. The M86 command is incorporated in the tool changemacro program. M86 is canceled by an M87 command.

When necessary, the M86 command is programmed by the machine operator when recover-ing from a tool changer fault. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on the FaultRecovery Procedures.

M-377B 1-43

Page 62: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M87 Cancel Tool Change Mode (Magazine 2)The M87 command deactivates tool change mode for tool magazine 2. Under normal condi-

tions, it is not necessary to program an M87. The M87 command is incorporated in the toolchange macro program. M87 is canceled by an M86 command.

When necessary, the M87 command is programmed by the machine operator when recover-ing from a tool changer fault. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on the FaultRecovery Procedures.

M98 Subprogram CallThis code must be in the main part program block which activates a subprogram. The P word

is used with the subprogram number to specify the subprogram to be run.

Example: M98 P1 ;

The M98 specifies a subprogram call and the P1 specifies subprogram #1 as thesubprogram to be run.

Refer to Subprograms, in Chapter 12.

M99 Subprogram EndM99 is used to return to the program that called the subprogram after the subprogram has

been completed. Refer to Subprograms, in Chapter 12.

M100 Circular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion

- NOTE -M100 is used to program circular pocket milling if the machine is equipped with thetool probe option. Use G12, page 1-14, to program circular pocket milling if the ma-chine is NOT equipped with the tool probe option.

The M100 command allows the programmer to define a circular pocket with one data block.The tool will follow a clockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information on pocket mill-ing.

M101 Circular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion

- NOTE -M101 is used to program circular pocket milling if the machine is equipped with thetool probe option. Use G13, page 1-14, to program circular pocket milling if the ma-chine is NOT equipped with the tool probe option.

The M101 command allows the programmer to define a circular pocket with one data block.The tool will follow a counterclockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional information onpocket milling.

1-44 M-377B

Page 63: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M102 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion

- NOTE -M101 is used to program rectangular pocket milling if the machine is equipped withthe tool probe option. Use G71, page 1-24, to program rectangular pocket milling ifthe machine is NOT equipped with the tool probe option.

The M102 command allows the programmer to define a square or rectangular pocket withone data block. The tool will follow a clockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional informa-tion on pocket milling.

M103 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion

- NOTE -M103 is used to program rectangular pocket milling if the machine is equipped withthe tool probe option. Use G72, page 1-24, to program rectangular pocket milling ifthe machine is NOT equipped with the tool probe option.

The M103 command allows the programmer to define a square or rectangular pocket withone data block. The tool will follow a counterclockwise path. Refer to Chapter 7 for additional in-formation on pocket milling.

M-377B 1-45

Page 64: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAM FORMAT

BEGINNING OF PROGRAM

% ; Stop code (End of record)

O____ ; Letter “O” and the program number

G20 or G21 ; Establish inch or metric mode

BEGINNING OF OPERATION

N__ (______) ; Sequence search number and message

M6 T__ (H1) ; Tool change sequence, H1 is an optionalcommand to move the table to X0. Y0.

G0 G90 X__ Y__ ; Positioning mode, Absolute positioning,Rapid to X,Y start point

G43 H__ Z__ S__ M13 or M14 ; Activate tool length compensation,Rapid to Z start point,Spindle RPM and direction, Coolant ON

G1 Z__ F__ ; Move to cut depth with feedrate

G41 or G42 D__ X__ Y__ ; Activate tool diameter compensation,Feed to X,Y start point

MACHINE PART

CLEAR PART

G40 X__ or Y__ ; Move off part to cancel tool compensation

G0 Z__ ; Rapid to Z safe position above part

G80 ; Cancel canned cycle

M9 ; Coolant OFF

G91 G30 Z0. Y0. M19 ; Rapid to tool change position,Move table to position for unloading,Orient spindle

PROGRAM ENDING

M30 ; Rewind program - Stop machine

% ; Stop code (End of record)

1-46 M-377B

Page 65: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 1-47

Page 66: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

1-48 M-377B

Page 67: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 2 - TOOL COMPENSATIONINTRODUCTION

Execution of the part program causes the spindle reference position to be positioned at coor-dinates specified by the program. However, metal removal does not take place at the spindlereference position. Tool compensation is used to indicate the location of the tool in relation tothe workpiece. An active tool diameter compensation code (G41 or G42) and the data in the se-lected tool diameter offset file (D word) allows the machine control to properly position the tool toperform the required cut, based on the geometry of the workpiece and direction of tool motion.An active tool length compensation code (G43) and the data in the selected tool offset file (Hword) allows the machine control to properly position the tool to perform the required cut, basedon the length of the tool from the gauge line.

Center working tools use tool length offsets (H word) and do not require tool diameter com-pensation. Non-center working tools use tool diameter offsets (D word) and tool length offsets (Hword) to indicate the location of the cutting tool in relation to the workpiece.

TOOL OFFSET DEFINITIONS

TOOL DIAMETER OFFSET

The radius of the tool will be the value entered into the tool offset file for the diameter offset.

TOOL LENGTH OFFSET

The distance from the tip of the tool to the spindle face will be the value entered into the tooloffset file for the length offset.

Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Offsets” for additional information on tool offsets.

M-377B 2-1

Page 68: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL COMPENSATION CODESTool compensation is accomplished through the use of tool offset files and tool compensation

codes. Tool compensation shifts the position of the tool, based on the value in the offset file.

G40 - Tool Diameter Compensation Cancel G43 - Tool Length Compensation Active

G41 - Tool Diameter Compensation (Tool Left of Part) G49 - Tool Length Compensation Cancel

G42 - Tool Diameter Compensation (Tool Right of Part)

The tool length offset must be activated (G43) before entering tool diameter compensationmode. When tool offsets are active while a part program is being executed, the “Actual Position”register will display the coordinates of the cutting surface of the milling tool.

PLANE SELECTIONPlane selection determines the two axes on which tool compensation will be effective in the

event that axis motion is commanded on all three axes (X, Y, and Z). G40 must be active whenplane selection is commanded. Tool diameter compensation (G41 or G42) is commanded afterthe plane selection command. G17 is the default plane selection.

G Code Plane Selection

G17 X and Y Axes

G18 X and Z Axes

G19 Y and Z Axes

2-2 M-377B

Page 69: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ACTIVATING TOOL COMPENSATIONA tool length offset must be activated before entering tool compensation mode. Tool length

offsets are activated by a G43 command with an H word to specify tool length compensation. AG49 command cancels the active tool offset. Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Offsets”for additional information on tool offsets.

A G41 or G42 command is programmed with a D word to activate tool compensation. The Dword specifies the tool register that contains the radius value of the tool. This block is called thetool compensation entry block. The G41 or G42 entry block must be a non-cutting move on atleast one of the axes selected with the plane selection command (G17, G18, or G19). The dis-tance of the move must be equal to or greater than the radius of the tool. This recommendeddistance is to ensure that the tool does not strike the workpiece.

To determine which G code to use, imagine you are sitting on the workpiece facing the direc-tion of tool motion. If the tool is on your left, G41 is the correct code. If the tool is on your right,G42 is the correct code. (Refer to Figure 2.1)

The control has a two block look-ahead capability, which enables the control to complete acompensated move with the tool in position to begin the next compensated move. While the cur-rently active block is being executed, the control searches ahead to read and process the nexttwo data blocks. Refer to Figure 2.2 for an comparison of programmed tool paths with and with-out tool compensation based on similar workpiece contours.

M-377B 2-3

Figure 2.1 - G41 / G42 Diagram

G41

G42

NOTE:Arrows indicate directionof tool motion.

G41 - Tool left of workpiece

G42 - Tool right of workpiece

+Y

+X

TI2989

Page 70: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

2-4 M-377B

Figure 2.2 - Tool Path Comparisons

Programmed Tool Path

Actual Cut

Programmed Tool Pathand Actual Cut

Tool Compensation Not Active

Tool Compensation Active

TI2990

Page 71: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAMMING COMPARISONThe same workpiece profile is shown in Figures 2.3 and 2.4 . Note the difference between the

programmed axis coordinates between the two programming methods.

When not using automatic tool compensation to make the control generate the proper toolpath, the programmer must perform the necessary calculations to offset the tool from theworkpiece based on the geometry of the tool. Any change in the tool radius will require programrevisions. Refer to Figure 2.3 for the tool coordinate locations when tool compensation is NOTused.

When using automatic tool compensation, the programmer can write a part program as if thespindle centerline were tracing the profile of the workpiece. Programs are written using coordi-nates taken directly from the workpiece. Refer to Figure 2.4 for the tool coordinate locationswhen tool compensation is used.

When tool compensation is used, the machine operator stores the D and H values of eachtool are stored in separate registers in the Tool Offset file and the control makes all necessarycalculations and compensations as the program is executed. If a tool is changed, the operatorcan simply modify the D and H values in the Tool Offset file and the control recalculates thecompensation as the program is executed again. Time consuming manual calculations are elimi-nated, as is the threat of large scale part program revisions due to tooling changes.

M-377B 2-5

Figure 2.3 - Coordinates Programmedwithout Tool Compensation

Direction ofTool Motion

Direction ofTool Motion

TI2992

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X3 Y3 X4 Y4

+Y

+X

R

Figure 2.4 - Coordinates Programmedwith Tool Compensation

Direction ofTool Motion

Direction ofTool Motion

TI2992

X1 Y1

X2 Y2

X3 Y3

X4 Y4

+YR

+X

Page 72: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ENTERING AND EXITING THE WORKPIECEWITH TOOL COMPENSATION ACTIVE

The angle of the entry and exit motion should be greater than or equal to 90 degrees. Referto Figure 2.5 for an illustration of correct axis motion. If the angle of the entry or exit motion isless than 90 degrees, the tool may be “boxed in”. When a tool is “boxed in”, it will not reach theprogrammed end point. Refer to Figure 2.6 for an illustration of incorrect axis motion and “boxingthe tool in”.

2-6 M-377B

Figure 2.5 - Correct Axis Motion

Figure 2.6 - Incorrect Axis Motion

Exit Move

Entry Move

Workpiece

Exit Angle

Entry Angle

G42

TI2995

Exit Move

EntryMove

Workpiece

Exit Angle

EntryAngle

G42

TI2996

Page 73: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SWITCHING G41 / G42 CODE- CAUTION -

Due to the way in which tool diameter compensation is interpolated, G41 orG42 should be programmed in a block with non-cutting linear motion. If tooldiameter compensation is activated in a block in which cutting is commanded,undesirable axis motion may occur.

To switch between the G41 and G42 modes, it is not necessary to program a G40 to cancelthe active compensation code. Programming the desired G41 or G42 with a non-cutting linearmove on either axis will cancel the active code and activate the new G code. For example, ifG41 is active and G42 is programmed, G41 will be canceled and G42 will be activated.

Care must be exercised when switching the tool compensation modes. Corner clipping canoccur when switching tool compensation modes. Refer to the example in Figure 2.7 .

Depending on the programmed tool path and the geometry of the cutting tool, it may be nec-essary to program tool movement as follows (Refer to Figure 2.8):

1. Program the end point of the first cut past the end of the actual cut.

2. Switch the tool diameter compensation mode during the non-cutting linear move to thestart point for the second cut.

3. Program the start point of the second cut in front of the beginning of the actual cut.

M-377B 2-7

Figure 2.7 - Corner Clipping WhenSwitching Tool Compensation

Corner Clipping

Corner Clipping+Y

+X

TI2993

Figure 2.8 - No Corner Clipping WhenSwitching Tool Compensation

2nd Cut StartPoint Shift

1st Cut EndPoint Shift+Y

+X

TI2993

Page 74: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVED AWAY FROM THE WORKPIECEWITH TOOL COMPENSATION ACTIVE

If a program is stopped during the execution of contouring with compensation active and thetool is moved away from the workpiece, either by a manual Jog operation or an Manual Data In-put command, do not resume the cycle from this new position. Reset the program and perform aProgram Restart operation.

CANCELING TOOL COMPENSATIONTo deactivate compensation, program a G40 along with a non-cutting linear move away from

the workpiece. This move will be on at least one of the axes selected with the plane selectioncommand (G17, G18, or G19). G17 is the default selection and will be active if no plane selec-tion command is programmed.

It is important that the motion in this block be non-cutting due to the way compensation is in-terpolated. An alarm will be displayed if circular motion is programmed in the exit block.

TOOL DIAMETER COMPENSATION PROGRAMMING RULES1. Store tool data in the tool offset file. The tool length offset (G43) must be activated prior

to activation of G41 or G42 tool diameter compensation.

2. To activate tool diameter compensation, program a G41 or G42 along with non-cuttinglinear motion on the axes specified by the plane selection command (G17, G18, orG19). Refer to page 2-2 for information on the plane selection command. The motionmust be equal to or greater than the radius value of the tool. Refer to page 2-3 for infor-mation on selecting the correct tool diameter compensation code (G41 or G42).

3. Entry to the workpiece should be greater than or equal to 90 degrees in relation to thedirection of the cut. Refer to the entry angle in Figure 2.5 .

4. Exit from the workpiece should be greater than or equal to 90 degrees in relation to thedirection of the cut. Refer to exit angle in Figure 2.5 .

5. Typically, tool diameter compensation is switched (G41 to G42 and vice versa) by pro-gramming the desired tool diameter compensation command with non-cutting motionaway from the workpiece greater than or equal to the radius of the cutting tool. This al-lows the machine control to properly compensate for the tool diameter without strikingthe workpiece.

The one exception to this rule is axis reversal. Axis reversal is accomplished by pro-gramming the required tool diameter compensation code (G41 or G42) with axis motionthat will send the tool back to the start point of the last programmed move.

6. When tool diameter compensation is active, only one data block which does not containaxis motion may be programmed between blocks which contain axis motion. If two ormore non-motion blocks are programmed consecutively, undesirable machine behaviorin the form of under-cutting or over-cutting may occur.

7. When clearing the workpiece, axis motion should move the tool away from theworkpiece on one of the axes specified by the plane selection command (G17, G18, orG19) before G40 is commanded. This move should be equal to or greater than the ra-dius value of the tool. Refer to page 2-2 for information on the plane selection com-mand.

2-8 M-377B

Page 75: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 2-9

Page 76: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

2-10 M-377B

Page 77: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

FEEDRATE

Feedrate is specified by the value after the word address F. This value can be expressed ininches [millimeters] per minute (G94 mode) or as inches [millimeters] per revolution (G95 mode).The maximum programmable feedrate is 472 inches per minute [12,000 millimeters per minute].Programmed feedrates greater than the maximum feedrate allowed will default to the maximumvalue upon program execution.

To convert in/min [mm/min] to in/rev [mm/rev], divide the in/min [mm/min] feedrate by the pro-grammed spindle speed:

English: in/min ÷ rev/min = in/revMetric: mm/min ÷ rev/min = mm/rev

To convert in/rev [mm/rev] to in/min [mm/min], multiply the in/rev [mm/rev] feedrate by theprogrammed spindle speed:

English: in/rev x rev/min = in/minMetric: mm/rev x rev/min = mm/min

To override programmed feedrates, use the Feedrate Override switch. The Feedrate Overrideswitch is disabled during tapping cycles.

ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING

ABSOLUTE

In absolute programming (G90 mode), the X, Y, and Z data words are used to specify theend point of a move as a coordinate on the work coordinate system. The following commandcalls for a linear move to position the tool reference position at “X.25 Y6.25 Z5.” on the work co-ordinate system:

G01 G90 G94 X.25 Y6.25 Z5. F10. ;

INCREMENTAL

In incremental programming (G91 mode), the X, Y, and Z words are used to specify the endpoint of a move as an incremental distance from the current position on the work coordinate sys-tem.

+X = To the left (as viewed from the front of the machine)-X = To the right (as viewed from the front of the machine)+Y = Toward the front of the machine-Y = Toward the back of the machine+Z = Toward the spindle Home position (upward)-Z = Toward the table (downward)

For example, the following command calls for an incremental linear move in which the tablemoves .500 inches in the +X direction and 2.5 inches in the -Y direction:

M-377B 3-1

Page 78: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

INTERPOLATION

Interpolation describes the function of the control when it decodes a block of programmeddata commanding axis motion. Given the type of motion, the feedrate, and the end point, thecontrol defines the tool path by generating a series of intermediate points between the currentslide position and the programmed end point. In the case of tapers and arcs, it also calculatesthe proper feedrate for each axis to produce the correct tool path.

There are two standard types of interpolation performed by the control:

Linear Interpolation

Circular Interpolation

LINEAR INTERPOLATION

Linear Interpolation is commanded by the G01 command. G01 is a modal code, which meansthat it will stay active until a G00 code (positioning) or a G02/G03 code (Circular Interpolation) isprogrammed. Therefore, it is necessary to program a G01 to return to Linear Interpolation froma currently active G00, G02, or G03 code because these codes are also modal.

With G01 active, program blocks command the tool to move in a straight line from its currentposition to a programmed end point. This end point is specified as either a absolute coordinateposition on the work coordinate system or as an incremental movement from the current slideposition. For example:

G01 G90 G95 X.25 Z2. F.008

Slides move from current position to work coordinate X.25 Z2.

G01 G91 G95 X.4 Z-1. F.008

X axis moves .4 inches in the positive direction as Z axis moves 1 inch in the negative di-rection.

Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius

When two linear moves (G01) intersect, it is possible to insert a chamfer or an arc betweenthem without adding a third program block or switching from linear interpolation to circular inter-polation and back again. The following rules apply:

1. Linear interpolation (G01) must be active during both moves.

2. The end point of the first block is the point where the linear moves would intersect if no chamferor radius was inserted. It is not the start point of the chamfer or radius.

INSERT CHAMFER

To insert a chamfer, program a “,C” word in the first of the two linear move (G01) blocks.These two linear moves do not have to be perpendicular to each other. The value for “,C” is un-signed. The comma (,) must precede the C word.

INSERT CORNER RADIUS

To insert an arc, program a “,R” word in the first of the two linear move (G01) blocks. Thesetwo linear moves do not have to be perpendicular to each other. The value for “,R” is unsigned.The comma (,) must precede the R word.

3-2 M-377B

Page 79: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ALARM MESSAGES FOR INSERT CHAMFER / INSERT CORNER RADIUS

Alarm 050:

Chamfer or corner radius is commanded in a block which also includes a threadcuttingcommand.

Alarm 051:

The move direction or move amount in the block following a block specifying a chamfer orcorner radius is not adequate.

Alarm 052:

The block following a block specifying a chamfer or corner radius is not in G01 mode. (Forexample, the second block is in G02 or G03 mode.)

Alarm 053:

C or R is programmed without a comma. The comma is required.

Alarm 054:

The next G01 block commands tapered motion (multiple axis motion) along with a com-mand for inserting a chamfer or corner radius.

Alarm 055:

The axis motion in the second block is less than the chamfer or corner radius value speci-fied in the first block.

M-377B 3-3

Figure 3.1 - Insert Chamfer / Insert Corner RadiusSample Program Segment

X4. Y0.

X4. Y-4.

X6. Y-4.

X6. Y-6.

X8. Y-6.

.25R

.25R

.20R

.25

.25

.25

.25

TI3009

N40 G01 G90 G94 X0. Y0. F6.5 ;

N50 X4. ,R.25 ;

N60 Y-4. ,R.25 ;

N70 X6. ,R.2 ;

N80 Y-6. ,C.25 ;

N90 X8. ,C.25 ;

N100 Y___ ;

Page 80: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

3-4 M-377B

Figure 3.2 - Insert Chamfer / Insert Corner Radius Diagram

INSERT CHAMFER

INSERT ARC

Y____ ,C____

X____

X____ ,C____

Y____

Y____ ,R____

X____

X____ ,R____

Y____

,C

,C

,C

,C

,C ,C

,C ,C

+Y

+Y

+Y

+Y

+Y

+Y

+Y

+Y

,R

,R

,R

,R

,R ,R

,R ,R

TI3010

Page 81: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

In Circular Interpolation the control uses the information contained in a single data block togenerate an arc. There are two types of Circular Interpolation:

Clockwise Arc (G02)

Counterclockwise Arc (G03)

The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) defines clockwise and counterclockwise arcs asfollows:

G02 Clockwise Arc (CW)

An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path ofthe tool with respect to the workpiece is clockwise when viewing the plane of motion fromthe positive to negative direction of the perpendicular axis. Refer to Figure 3.3.

G03 Counterclockwise Arc (CCW)

An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path ofthe tool with respect to the workpiece is counterclockwise when viewing the plane of motionin the positive to negative direction of the perpendicular axis. Refer to Figure 3.3.

Besides containing the G code for the rotational direction of tool movement, the data blockspecifying circular interpolation must contain information indicating the position of the arc endpoint and the location of the arc center. Data words used to specify these parameters are sum-marized in the chart on page 3-10.

Note the differences in the definitions depending on whether tool compensation is active or in-active. As indicated with tool compensation active, the location of the arc end point and arc cen-ter is independent of the tool geometry. These dimensions are taken from the part and the con-trol performs the necessary compensation to generate the proper arc. Refer to Chapter 2, “ToolCompensation”.

M-377B 3-5Revised: July 26, 2004

Page 82: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Plane Selection

Plane selection determines the two axes on which circular interpolation will be effective in theevent that axis motion is commanded on all three axes (X, Y, and Z). Refer to the next section,entitled “Helical Interpolation” for information on programming all three axes.

G17 is the default plane selection.

G Code Plane Selection

G17 X and Y Axes

G18 X and Z Axes

G19 Y and Z Axes

3-6 M-377BRevised: July 26, 2004

Figure 3.3 - Circular Interpolation Illustrations

G02

G03

Viewed from +Z Direction

(Top of Machine)

Viewed from +Y Direction

(Front of Machine)

Viewed from +X Direction

(Left Side of Machine)

G02

G03

G02

G03

G17 Plane Selection Active G18 Plane Selection Active G19 Plane Selection Active

+Y

+X

+Z

+X

+Z

+Y

TI2997

Page 83: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Automatic Corner Override

- NOTE -

This feature is present only on machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or 18-MCControl.

The Automatic Corner Override function causes the control to automatically reduce programfeedrates during circular movement. This enables the machine to reach a higher degree of accu-racy, resulting in a smoother cut during circular moves.

Automatic Corner Override Settings:

18i-MC Control

Parameter No.:1601 Bit 6 [ACD]

0: The Function Not Used

1: The Function Used

0i-M Control

Parameter No.:8131 Bit 3 [AOV]

0: The Function Not Used

1: The Function Used

Helical Interpolation

Helical interpolation is enabled when circular interpolation is commanded and motion is pro-grammed on all three axes. Circular interpolation is applied to the axes specified by the planeselection command (G17, G18, or G19) and linear interpolation is applied to the axis not se-lected by the plane selection command.

EXAMPLES:

G17 [G02 or G03] X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

Circular Interpolation is applied the X and Y axes. Linear interpolation is applied to the Zaxis.

G18 [G02 or G03] X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

Circular Interpolation is applied the X and Z axes. Linear interpolation is applied to the Yaxis.

G19 [G02 or G03] X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

Circular Interpolation is applied the Y and Z axes. Linear interpolation is applied to the Xaxis.

FEEDRATE

The F data word specifies the feedrate along the radius of the arc.

The feedrate for the linear interpolated axis is calculated as follows:

Programmed Feedrate x [Length of Linear Axis ÷ Length of Circular Arc]

M-377B 3-7Revised: July 26, 2004

Page 84: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Sample Part Program Structure

Figure 3.4 illustrates a sample tool path and the basic program structure required for circularinterpolation on the X and Y axes. The cutting tool is programmed to move to the start point ofeach arc using G01 (Linear Interpolation). The program block commanding circular interpolationspecifies the type of arc (G02 or G03), the end point of the arc, and the radius. G01 is pro-grammed to cancel circular interpolation after each arc has been completed.

.

N50 G17 Select X and Y Axes for Circular Interpolation

N60 G0 G41 G90 G94 X-.35 Y0. D5 ; Establish Positioning Mode, Tool Compensation, AbsoluteProgramming, Inch/Minute Feed, Specify Start Point

N70 G1 X3. F5. ; Establish Linear Interpolation, X Coordinate of Linear Move,Establish Cutting Feedrate

N80 G2 X4. Y-1. R1. ; Establish Clockwise Circular Interpolation, Specify Arc EndPoint and Radius of Arc

N90 G1 Y-2. ; Establish Linear Interpolation, Y Coordinate of Linear Move

N100 G3 X5. Y-3. R1. ; Establish Counterclockwise Circular Interpolation, SpecifyArc End Point and Radius of Arc

N110 G1 X8. ; Establish Linear Interpolation, X Coordinate of Linear Move

N120 Y-5.35 ; Y Coordinate of Linear Move

.

3-8 M-377BRevised: July 26, 2004

Figure 3.4 - Workpiece Profile forSample Part Program

X-.35 Y0.StartPoint

X3. Y0.

X4. Y-1.

X5. Y-3. X8. Y-3.

X0. Y0.

X8. Y-5.35

X4. Y-2.

R1.

R1.

-Y

+X

TI4922

Page 85: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation

1. In circular interpolation, the feedrate along the arc (feedrate tangent to the arc) is held within±2% of the programmed feedrate.

2. If I and J are used to indicate the arc center, and either I or J is equal to zero, that word may beomitted.

3. If I and J are used to indicate the arc center and both I and J are programmed as zero with toolcompensation (G41 or G42) inactive, the tool will move linearly from the arc start point to the arcend point. However, if I and J are programmed as zero with tool compensation active, alarmmessage “038 PROGRAM” will appear on the control display screen. This alarm indicates thatovercutting will occur because the arc start point coincides with the arc center.

4. If I, J, and R are programmed in the same data block, the control will ignore the I and J andgenerate the arc using R to locate the arc center.

5. If R is used to locate an arc center, a zero degree arc is assumed (no tool motion occurs) if anyof the following three conditions occurs:

A) If the programmed coordinate of the end point of the arc is the same as the coordinate of thestart point.

B) If the arc end point coordinates are omitted in absolute mode (G90).

C) If the arc end point coordinates are programmed as zero in incremental mode (G91).

6. If R is used to indicate the arc center, but the R value is less than half the distance from the arcstart point to the arc end point, R is ignored and a half circle is produced which connects the arcstart point and arc end point.

7. Circular Interpolation may be switched without canceling with G01.

8. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be programmed to cancel Circular Interpolation.

M-377B 3-9Revised: July 26, 2004

Page 86: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Circular Interpolation Parameter Definitions

TYPE OFDEFINITION

COMMAND DEFINITION(Tool Compensation Inactive)

DEFINITION(Tool Compensation Active)

Location ofArc Center

I,J,K

Incremental distance from thecenter of the tool at the arc startpoint to the arc center.

NOTE:This value must be signed.This incremental distance dependson the diameter of the tool.

Refer to Figure 3.5.

Incremental distance from the arcstart point to the arc center.

NOTE:This value must be signed.This incremental distance remainsthe same regardless of thediameter of the tool.

Refer to Figure 3.6.

R

Radius of the arc. The radius ismeasured from the center of thetool to the arc center.

This value is positive for arcs � 180degrees.

This value is negative for arcs �

180 degrees.

NOTE:This distance depends on thediameter of the tool.

Refer to Figure 3.5.

Radius of the arc. The radius ismeasured from the arc start pointto the arc center.

This value is positive for arcs � 180degrees.

This value is negative for arcs �

180 degrees.

NOTE:This distance remains the sameregardless of the diameter of thetool.

Refer to Figure 3.6.

Location ofArc End Point

X,Y,Z(G90 Mode)

Coordinate of the center of the toolat the arc end point.

NOTE:This coordinate depends on thediameter of the tool.

Refer to Figure 3.7.

Coordinate of the arc end point.

NOTE:This coordinate is independent ofthe diameter of the tool.

Refer to Figure 3.8.

X,Y,Z(G91 Mode)

Incremental distance from thecenter of the tool at the arc startpoint to the center of the tool at thearc end point.

NOTE:This coordinate depends on thediameter of the tool.

Refer to Figure 3.7.

Incremental distance from the arcstart point to the arc end point.

This incremental move isindependent of the diameter of thetool.

Refer to Figure 3.8.

3-10 M-377BRevised: July 26, 2004

Page 87: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B 3-11Revised: July 26, 2004

Figure 3.5 - Arc Center Parameters(Tool Compensation Inactive)

Arc Center

Arc Center

R

I

J

R

IJ

+X

+Y

TI2999

Figure 3.6 - Arc Center Parameters(Tool Compensation Active)

Arc Center

Arc Center

R

I

J

R

I

J

+X

+Y

TI3001

Page 88: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

3-12 M-377BRevised: July 26, 2004

Figure 3.7 - Arc End Point Parameters(Tool Compensation Inactive)

Arc Center

Arc CenterX,Y (G90)

X

(G91)

+X

+Y

TI3000

Y

(G91)

X

(G91)

Y

(G91)

X,Y (G90)

Figure 3.8 - Arc End Point Parameters(Tool Compensation Active)

Arc Center

Arc CenterX,Y (G90)

X

(G91)

+X

+Y

TI3002

Y

(G91)

X

(G91)

Y

(G91)

X,Y (G90)

Page 89: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 3-13

Page 90: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

3-14 M-377B

Page 91: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 4 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMSINTRODUCTION

The machine head and table are positioned by rotating lead screws, which are driven byservo motors. The revolutions of each screw are counted by an encoder. The encoder is an inte-gral part of the axis drive motor and continuously monitors the radial position of the lead screw.Information from the encoder is fed to the control where it is converted into useful output infor-mation to produce the correct feedrate and slide position.

The machine table is driven by 10 millimeter pitch lead screws on the X and Y axes. The ma-chine head is driven by a 10 millimeter pitch lead screw on the Z axis. One revolution of a leadscrew equals 10 millimeter (.3937 inches) of slide travel. As the lead screw rotates so does theencoder shaft, which causes the encoder to generate positioning and velocity data. This data isfed to the control for positioning and velocity control functions.

To move a slide .306 inch, we enter a coded instruction into the control specifying type of mo-tion (linear or circular), velocity (feedrate), and distance. (Distance can be indicated as an incre-mental distance from the current position or as a coordinate which represents the endpoint ofthe move.) Internally, the control decodes the instruction and converts the command into a volt-age which is sent to the servo motor of the slide. As the servo motor turns the lead screw, thelead screw turns the encoder shaft and the encoder produces positioning and velocity data. Thisdata is fed back to the control where it is used to monitor slide motion.

The distance from the current slide position to the commanded end point is known as the Dis-tance To Go. Before any slide motion takes place in our example, the distance to go is .306inch. This value is stored in a register in the control. As the lead screw rotates, the control re-ceives counts from the encoder and subtracts them from the Distance To Go register. When theDistance To Go registers count down to zero, the control knows that the slide has moved .3060( �.0001) inches.

This feedback arrangement, in which the actual slide movement is compared with the com-mand originating from the control, is known as a closed loop system. Besides the closed loopsystem for slide position discussed above, there is also a closed loop system for feedrate, whichmakes use of the electrical pulses produced by the encoder.

By making use of the feedback information it receives from the encoder, the control can accu-rately move a slide a commanded distance at a commanded feedrate. As one might expect, be-fore this accurate closed loop positioning system can be used, the control must be synchronizedwith the machine tool. That is, the position coordinates indicated by the control must be made toreflect the actual position of the slides. This is achieved by performing a Zero Return (ReferenceHome) operation.

M-377B 4-1

Page 92: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ZERO RETURN (REFERENCE HOME)When the control ON push button is pressed to start up the machine, the control does not

know the position of the slides. To synchronize the control/machine tool system, each slide mustbe moved to its Zero Return (Reference Home) position. This position is also referred to as Ref-erence Zero.

- NOTE -The coordinate position values shown in this section assume that the Work Shift isset to X0. Y0. Z0. and that no tool offset is active.

A Zero Return operation positions the slides at the Home position. Refer to the Appendix forillustrations showing the Home positions. After the slides have been moved to this position, theAbsolute position registers are automatically set at X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0.

X, Y, AND Z AXESThe three standard machine axes are labeled as follows:

X Axis: Horizontal motion of the table parallel to the spindle face and parallel with the front ofthe machine.

Y Axis: Horizontal motion of the table parallel to the spindle face and perpendicular with thefront of the machine.

Z Axis: Vertical motion of the head, which houses the machine spindle.

Throughout this manual we will refer to the table as the X and Y axes and the head, whichhouses the machine spindle, as the Z axis. These letter designations for the three axes are rec-ommended by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) and the International Standards Orga-nization (ISO). In an effort to promote interchangeability and prevent misunderstandings betweenNC manufacturers and purchasers, EIA has set forth recommended standards for such things asaxis and motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape, operational command anddata format, and electrical interface between numerical controls and machine tools.

4-2 M-377B

Page 93: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

RECTANGULAR COORDINATESTo establish a system of relating the position of the tool to a position on the workpiece, we

must first set up a system where we can define the location of a given point relative to a knownreference point. Since we have mutually perpendicular axes (X, Y, and Z), we can use rectangu-lar coordinates (also known as Cartesian coordinates) to describe the location of any point atwhich the tool can be positioned.

To apply the use of rectangular coordinates, it is necessary to define two reference points:

1. A zero point (X0 Y0 Z0) for the work coordinate system.

2. A tool reference point.

COORDINATE SYSTEM DISPLAYSThe power-up procedure calls for a Zero Return operation to synchronize the control/machine

tool system. This operation sets the registers at their initial values. After performing the Zero Re-turn procedure, press the Position key; then, press the ALL soft key to display the following posi-tion registers on the control display screen:

- ABSOLUTE- DISTANCE TO GO- MACHINE- RELATIVE

- NOTE -The “Distance To Go” registers are only displayed in Automatic or Manual Data In-put mode.

For this discussion, we are concerned with the Machine and Absolute position registers. TheMachine registers display the position of axis reference points relative to the machine Zero Re-turn (Reference Zero) position. The Zero Return coordinates are X0. Y0. Z0.

The Machine registers display the position of axis reference points relative to this position.These registers cannot be modified. They always display the “true” axis position relative to theReference Home position.

Of greater interest to the programmer are the Absolute position registers, which can be modi-fied. The Absolute position registers display the position of the tool reference point as a coordi-nate on the work coordinate system. The work coordinate system is a rectangular coordinatesystem with it’s origin (origin = X0 Y0 Z0) equal to the origin of the Absolute registers.

Unless a work coordinate offset is used, after a Zero Return operation, the Z axis origin ofthe work coordinate system is the Z0 (zero) reference position.

Unless a tool offset is used, the tool reference point is the intersection of the spindle faceand the spindle centerline.

Unless modified, the coordinate system relates the spindle face and spindle centerline tothe Z0 (zero) reference position.

To simplify programming, the programmer can modify the coordinate system to relate the lo-cation of the zero coordinates on the workpiece.

Refer to Chapter 3 for additional information on Feedrate, Absolute and Incremental Pro-gramming, and Linear Interpolation.

M-377B 4-3

Page 94: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

STANDARD PROGRAMMABLE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMSThe control is equipped with 6 standard programmable work coordinate systems. These pro-

grammable work coordinate systems are selected through the use of the G54 through G59 com-mands. G54 is the power-up default and is active after a control reset .

The work coordinate offset moves the origin of the work coordinate system according to theX, Y, and Z values stored in the active work coordinate file. Immediately after a work coordinateoffset is commanded, the control adds it to the Absolute position registers. The values stored ina commanded G54 coordinate system are active until canceled by another coordinate systemcommand. The values stored in a commanded G55, G56, G57, G58, or G59 coordinate systemare active until canceled by another coordinate system command, a control reset, or an “end ofprogram” command.

Multiple work coordinate systems allows the programmer to use the same part program tomachine several workpieces mounted on the machine table. Instead of programming eachworkpiece, the program shifts the coordinate system to the next workpiece to be machined. Re-fer to the illustration in Figure 4.1 .

- CAUTION -Any non-zero value entered into the Z axis field of the active work coordinatefile must be a negative number.

The values stored in the work coordinate file are subtracted from the Absolute position regis-ters, thus shifting the origin of the work coordinate system by the amount stored in the workcoordinate file. For example, if the X axis is at 8 inches and the operator stores X2.5 in the ac-tive work coordinate file, the Absolute position registers would then display X5.5 [8 - 2.5].

4-4 M-377B

Figure 4.1 - Sample Coordinate System Shifts

G54Coordinate

SystemShift

G55Coordinate

SystemShift

G56Coordinate

SystemShift

G57Coordinate

SystemShift

G58Coordinate

SystemShift

G59Coordinate

SystemShift

ShiftedX0. Y0. Z0.

ShiftedX0. Y0. Z0.

ShiftedX0. Y0. Z0.

ShiftedX0. Y0. Z0.

ShiftedX0. Y0. Z0.

ShiftedX0. Y0. Z0.

TI4094

Machine X0. Y0. Z0.

Page 95: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

It may be desirable to store the height of a reference surface on the workpiece as the Z axiswork coordinate offset. When this value is stored and activated, the reference surface of theworkpiece becomes “Z0". The Z axis work coordinate is stored as a NEGATIVE value.

The X and Y work coordinate offsets are used to shift the X and Y zero coordinates as speci-fied by the values in the active work coordinate. The X axis work coordinate is stored as POSI-TIVE value. The Y axis work coordinate is stored as NEGATIVE value.

SAMPLE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT

Figures 4.2 and 4.3 illustrate the work coordinate system shift when the registers for the ac-tive programmable work coordinate system contain the following values: X8. Y-6. Z-15.75

M-377B 4-5

Figure 4.2 - X and Y Axis Coordinate System Shift

Machine X0. Y0.

6.000

8.000

Shifted X0. Y0.

TI4073

Figure 4.3 - Z Axis Coordinate System Shift

Spindle Home PositionMachine Z0.

15.750

TI4074

Table Surface

Shifted Z0.

Page 96: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMABLE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMSThe control is equipped with 48 additional programmable work coordinate systems. These ad-

ditional programmable work coordinate systems are selected through the use of the “G54P__”command. The valid range of values for the P word is 1 through 48.

TO STORE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA FROM A PROGRAMCoordinate system data can be input directly from a program by using the G10 code.

Programming Format:

G10 L2 P__ X_____ Y_____ Z_____ ;

or

G10 L20 P__ X_____ Y_____ Z_____ ;

Data Word Definitions:

G10 : Data input command

L2 : Set standard work coordinate systemP_ : Selects the work coordinate system to be modified.

P1 = G54 coordinate systemP2 = G55 coordinate systemP3 = G56 coordinate systemP4 = G57 coordinate systemP5 = G58 coordinate systemP6 = G59 coordinate system

L20 : Set additional work coordinate systemP_ : P1 through P48 to set optional coordinate system 1 through 48

X_ : Value for X axis coordinate shift

Y_ : Value for Y axis coordinate shift

Z_ : Value for Z axis coordinate shift

When G90 (absolute mode) is active and work coordinate data is input through the use of theG10 command, the programmed work coordinate data will OVERWRITE data in the specifiedwork coordinate system file.

When G91 (incremental mode) is active and work coordinate data is input through the use ofthe G10 command, the programmed work coordinate data will be ADDED TO data in the speci-fied work coordinate system file.

4-6 M-377B

Page 97: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G52 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM

INTRODUCTION

- CAUTION -Activate tool compensation after G52 has been commanded.

The G52 command allows the programmer to create a subordinate coordinate system insidethe currently active work coordinate system (G54 ~ G59). This subordinate coordinate system isalso called a local coordinate system.

ACTIVATING G52

When the G52 command line is read by the machine control, the origin of the currently activework coordinate system is shifted by the values specified by the X, Y, and Z data words. Referto the examples shown in Figure 4.4 . It is not necessary to command all three axes in the G52command line.

Programming Format: G52 X_ Y_ Z_ ;

RESTRICTIONS

1. G52 is automatically canceled when another work coordinate system is programmed. Ifrequired, the G52 command must be programmed whenever a work coordinate systemis commanded.

2. The first axis motion commanded after G52 is programmed must be in absolute (G90)mode.

M-377B 4-7

Figure 4.4 - G52 Coordinate System Shift

G54 CoordinateSystem Shift

G56 CoordinateSystem Shift

G58 CoordinateSystem Shift

Machine CoordinateSystem Origin

G52 Shift

G52 Shift

G52 Shift

TI4099

Page 98: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CANCELING G52

1. Press the control Reset push button.

2. Manually home the machine axes. Refer to Chapter 2 of the operator’s manual (M-400)for information on manually homing the machine axes.

3. Program the G52 command with X0. Y0. Z0.

Example:

A local G52 was previously established by programming “G52 X2. Y1.5 ;”. Pro-gramming “G52 X0. Y0. ;” will cancel the local coordinate system.

4. Program another work coordinate system.

Example:

If G54 was active when the local coordinate system was established, programming aG55 ~ G59 will cancel the local coordinate system.

5. Programming a G92 absolute coordinate shift will cancel the local coordinate system.

4-8 M-377B

Page 99: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G92 ABSOLUTE COORDINATE SHIFTThe G92 command allows the programmer to alter the values in the Absolute position regis-

ters.

- CAUTION -Exercise care when setting the Z axis Absolute position register with the G92command. Incorrect settings can cause the tool to strike the machine table,workpiece, or work-holding device during program execution.

1. Move the axis (axes) to be shifted to the desired position.

2. Program the G92 command with the desired axis (axes) and coordinate value(s). Referto the following examples:

G92 X0. Y0. Z0. ; The X, Y, and Z axis Absolute position registers will be changed to “0".

G92 X2.5 ; The X axis Absolute position register will be changed to “2.5".

G92 X0. Y4.25 ; The X axis Absolute position register will be changed to “0" and the Yaxis Absolute position register will be changed to ”4.25".

G92 X1.25 Y3.65 Z -1.25 ; The X axis Absolute position register will be changed to “1.25", the Yaxis Absolute position register will be changed to ”3.65" and the Z axisAbsolute position register will be changed to “-1.25".

When the G92 data block is executed, the position registers in the Absolute position displaywill be changed to the values programmed in the G92 data block.

G92 PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. G92 Coordinate System Shift can be canceled using either of the following two methods:

- Home the machine axes. Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information onhoming the machine axes.

- Power down the machine control.

2. At least one axis and coordinate value MUST be programmed with the G92 command.

3. The G92 command does NOT cause axis motion.

4. G92 can be commanded in Automatic or Manual Data Input mode.

5. Only the axis (axes) programmed with the G92 command will be altered.

6. Do not program any other data in the G92 data block. Program only the G92 commandwith the desired axis (axes) and coordinate value(s).

M-377B 4-9

Page 100: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

POLAR COORDINATESPolar coordinate programming allows the programmer to specify coordinate positions in terms

of angle and distance relative to either of the following:

- the zero point of the currently active coordinate system.- the current position of the axes.

G CODES

The polar coordinate G codes are modal.

G15 - Polar Coordinates OFFG16 - Polar Coordinates ON

PLANE SELECTION

Plane selection is accomplished through the following commands

G17 - XY PlaneG18 - XZ PlaneG19 - YZ Plane

- NOTE -Refer to Positioning Modes, below, to determine the origin to be used for establish-ing the radius and angle of the move.

The plane selection determines the data word to be used for the radius value of the polarmove and the data word that specified the angle of the move.

With G17 active, the X word is used to specify the radius of the polar move and the Yword is used to specify the angle of the move on the Y axis relative to the X axis.

With G18 active, the X word is used to specify the radius of the polar move and the Zword is used to specify the angle of the move on the Z axis relative to the X axis.

With G19 active, the Y word is used to specify the radius of the polar move and the Zword is used to specify the angle of the move on the Z axis relative to the Y axis.

Positive angular commands are counterclockwise and negative angular commands are clock-wise with respect to the axis that specifies the radius value.

POSITIONING MODES

- NOTE -Angle and radius values may be independently programmed as absolute or incre-mental values. It is not required that both values be specified in the same position-ing mode.

Absolute PositioningPolar moves commanded while absolute positioning (G90) is active will be performed in rela-

tion to the zero point of the currently active coordinate system.

Incremental PositioningPolar moves commanded while incremental positioning (G91) is active will be performed in re-

lation to the current position of the axes.

4-10 M-377B

Page 101: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

POLAR COORDINATE PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES

For consistency, the polar programming examples shown in Figures 4.5 through 4.8 use theG17 (XY) plane selection.

Figures 4.6 and 4.7 assume a move from X0,Y0 to the initial point. This move establishes thebase angle, from which the incremental angle is measured.

M-377B 4-11

Figure 4.5 - Absolute Radius and Angle

CommandedPosition

InitialPosition

Radius

Angle

X0. Y0.

+X

+Y

TI3173

Figure 4.6 - Incremental Radius and Angle

CommandedPosition

InitialPosition

Radius

Angle

X0. Y0.

+X

+Y

TI3174

Figure 4.7 - Absolute Radiusand Incremental Angle

CommandedPosition

InitialPosition

RadiusAngle

X0. Y0.

+X

+Y

TI3175

Figure 4.8 - Incremental Radiusand Absolute Angle

CommandedPosition

InitialPosition

Radius

Angle

X0. Y0.

+X

+Y

TI3176

Page 102: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT FOR A BOLT CIRCLE

In these sample program segments, three holes are to be drilled on a bolt circle. The X0,Y0position for the active coordinate system has been set to the center of the bolt circle. Refer toFigure 4.9 .

Using Absolute Radius and Absolute Angle

.

G17 G90 G16 ; XY Plane Selection, Absolute Positioning,Polar Coordinate Programming ON

G81 G98 X4. Y30. Z-1. R.1 F3.7 ; Activate Drill Cycle, Select Retract Point, Radius set to 4inches from X0Y0, Absolute angle set to 30 degrees(Hole #1), Drill Depth, Return Point, Feedrate

Y150. ; Absolute angle set to 150 degrees (Hole #2)

Y270. ; Absolute angle set to 270 degrees (Hole #3)

G15 G80 ; Polar Coordinate Programming OFF, Cancel Drill Cycle

.

Using Absolute Radius and Incremental Angle

.

G17 G90 G16 ; XY Plane Selection, Absolute Positioning,Polar Coordinate Programming ON

G81 G98 X4. Y30. Z-1. R.1 F3.7 ; Activate Drill Cycle, Select Retract Point, Radius set to 4inches from X0Y0, Absolute angle set to 30 degrees(Hole #1), Drill Depth, Return Point, Feedrate

G91 Y120. ; Incremental angle set to 120 degrees from previous angle(Hole #2)

Y120. ; Incremental angle set to 120 degrees from previous angle(Hole #3)

G15 G80 ; Polar Coordinate Programming OFF, Cancel Drill Cycle

.

4-12 M-377B

Figure 4.9 - Bolt Circle

+Y (90°)

+X (0°)

Hole #2 (150°Absolute Angle)

Hole #3 (150°Absolute Angle)

Hole #1

120°Incremental

Angle)

120°Incremental Angle)

30°

X0. Y0.

Radius = 4.0

TI3177

Page 103: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 4-13

Page 104: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

4-14 M-377B

Page 105: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 5 - TOOL SELECTION AND OFFSETSAUTOMATIC TOOL CHANGER

Three tool magazine configurations are available:

- The machining center is equipped with a single 20 station drum tool magazine (Maga-zine 1), located to the left of the machine spindle. This is the standard configuration.

- The machining center is equipped with two 20 station drum tool magazines; Magazine1 is located to the left of the machine spindle and Magazine 2 is located to the right ofthe machine spindle. This is an optional configuration.

- The machining center is equipped with a single 24 station swing arm tool magazine(Magazine 1), located to the left of the machine spindle. This is an optional configura-tion.

During a programmed tool change, the tool magazine automatically takes the shortest path tomove the selected tool to the tool change position.

COMMANDING TOOL CHANGESThere are two distinct commands that relate to the tool change process:

1. Program a T word to command the tool magazine to position the required tool at the toolchange position. Refer to “Tool Magazine”, below.

2. Program an M06 command to perform the actual tool change. Refer to M06 Command,on the next page.

TOOL MAGAZINE

Tool selection is accomplished by commanding a T word from the part program. When a validT word is programmed, the tool magazine indexes the required tool to the change position.

The T word has the data word format T2, with the following range of values:

One Drum Tool Magazine [Standard]: T01 through T20

Two Drum Tool Magazines [Option]: T01 through T40

Swing Arm Tool Magazine [Option}: T01 through T24

Decimal point programming is not allowed with the T word.

M-377B 5-1

Page 106: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M06 COMMAND

- NOTE -It is required that the T word for the required tool be programmed on the M06 com-mand line. This ensures that the correct tool is at the tool change position in theevent that the part program was stopped and the tool magazine was indexed man-ually. Refer to “Suggested Programming Format”, page 5-3.

Drum Tool MagazineThe M06 command causes the following actions to be performed:

1. Z axis moves to the tool change position.

2. Tool air blast ON.

3. Spindle orient.

4. Tool magazine grips the tool in the machine spindle.

5. Spindle releases the tool.

6. Z axis moves upward to Z home position.

7. Tool magazine indexes to the next tool.

8. Z axis moves downward to the tool change position. Spindle air blast ON.

9. Spindle grips the tool.

10. Tool magazine releases the tool.

11. Tool magazine retracts.

Swing Arm Tool MagazineThe M06 command causes the following actions to be performed:

1. Move the Z axis to the tool change position and orient the spindle.

2. Lower the tool pocket at the tool change position.

3. The tool change arm exchanges the tool at the tool change position with the tool cur-rently in the machine spindle.

5-2 M-377B

Page 107: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SUGGESTED PROGRAMMING FORMAT

The T word for the required tool is commanded on each M06 command line. This ensuresthat the correct tool is at the tool change position in the event that the part program was stoppedand the tool magazine was indexed manually.

After the tool change has been completed, the tool magazine is commanded to index the nextrequired tool to the tool change position. The last tool change sequence will position the first toolat the tool change position.

The following example illustrates the recommended programming format to be used for toolchanges. This example is based on a machining process that requires six tools.

EXAMPLE

O0100 ; Program Number

.

.

M06 T01 ; Cancel Active Tool Offset,Z Axis to Tool Change Position,Orient Spindle,If necessary, position Tool #1 at Tool Change Position,Execute Tool Change Sequence (Load First Tool)

. Machine Workpiece with First Tool

. “

M06 T02 ; Cancel Active Tool Offset,Z Axis to Tool Change Position,Orient Spindle,If necessary, position Tool #2 at Tool Change Position,Execute Tool Change Sequence (Exchange First Tool with Second Tool)

. Machine Workpiece with Second Tool

. “

M06 T03; Cancel Active Tool Offset,Z Axis to Tool Change Position,Orient Spindle,If necessary, position Tool #3 at Tool Change Position,Execute Tool Change Sequence (Exchange Second Tool with Third Tool)

. Machine Workpiece with Third Tool

. “

(Continued on next page)

M-377B 5-3

Page 108: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M06 T04 ; Cancel Active Tool Offset,Z Axis to Tool Change Position,Orient Spindle,If necessary, position Tool #4 at Tool Change Position,Execute Tool Change Sequence (Exchange Third Tool with Fourth Tool)

. Machine Workpiece with Fourth Tool

. “

M06 T05 ; Cancel Active Tool Offset,Z Axis to Tool Change Position,Orient Spindle,If necessary, position Tool #5 at Tool Change Position,Execute Tool Change Sequence (Exchange Fourth Tool with Fifth Tool)

. Machine Workpiece with Fifth Tool

. “

M06 T06 ; Cancel Active Tool Offset,Z Axis to Tool Change Position,Orient Spindle,If necessary, position Tool #6 at Tool Change Position,Execute Tool Change Sequence (Exchange Fifth Tool with Sixth Tool)

. Machine Workpiece with Sixth Tool

. “

End of Program

5-4 M-377B

Page 109: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL OFFSETSThe tool offset file consists of 200 offset registers (Offsets 01 through 200). The tool offset file

allow the operator to easily make adjustments that may result from tool changes, eliminatinglarge-scale modifications to the part programs. These offset registers are used for tool lengthand tool diameter offsets. The type of offset (length or diameter) is determined by which dataword is used to call the offset.

Examples:

If offset 01 is called as a tool length offset: H01 (or H1)If offset 01 is called as a tool diameter offset: D01 (or D1)If offset 02 is called as a tool length offset: H02 (or H2)If offset 02 is called as a tool diameter offset: D02 (or D2)

- CAUTION -Information stored in the tool offset files is NOT automatically converted intothe correct units when a programmed G20 or G21 command switches the pro-gramming units between inch and metric. Offsets in the desired unit of mea-sure should be entered after the control has been set to the proper mode, inch(G20) vs metric (G21). If a G20 or G21 is programmed after the tool offsets areentered, the decimal point will be shifted one place to the left or right. Ifstart-up mode is G20 (inch) and the program switches to G21 (metric), the off-set decimal point will shift one place to the right. If start-up mode is G21 (met-ric) and the program switches to G20 (inch), the offset decimal point will shiftone place to the left.

TOOL LENGTH OFFSETS (H WORD)

Tool length offsets shift the spindle reference point from the spindle face to the tip of the tool.This value is entered into the tool offset register as a positive value. Refer to Figure 5.1 . Toollength offsets are activated by commanding G43 with a valid H word from the part program. Themachine control uses the value in the specified tool offset register to properly position the toolon the Z axis. The H word has the data word format H3, with a valid range from “H00" to”H200".

When the control reads an “H1" through ”H200" from the part program, the specified offset isactivated for tool length compensation. Decimal point programming is not allowed with the Hword.

When the control reads an “H00" or a G49 command (Tool Length Compensation Cancel),the currently active tool length offset is canceled.

The machine operator can make adjustments to the tool offset register to compensate for toolwear or variation. Adjustments for tool wear are typically negative values that are added to thevalue in the offset register.

M-377B 5-5

Page 110: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL DIAMETER OFFSETS (D WORD)

The distance from the cutting edge to the center of the tool. Tool diameter offsets shift thespindle reference point from the spindle centerline to the cutting edge of the tool. This value isentered into the tool offset register as a positive value. Refer to Figure 5.1 .

Tool diameter offsets are activated by programming a tool diameter compensation command(G41 or G42) with a valid D word from the part program. When a tool diameter compensationcommand is active, the machine control uses the value in the specified tool offset to properly po-sition the tool on the X and Y axes. The D word has the data word format D3, with a valid rangefrom “D00" to ”D200".

When the control reads an “D1" through ”D200" from the part program, the specified tool off-set is activated for tool diameter compensation. Decimal point programming is not allowed withthe D word.

When the control reads a “D00" or a G40 command (Tool Diameter Compensation Cancel),the currently active tool diameter offset is canceled.

The machine operator can make adjustments to the tool offset register to compensate for toolwear or variation. All adjustments for tool wear are negative values that are added to the valuein the offset register.

Refer to “Chapter 2 - Tool Compensation” for additional information on the tool compensationcommands.

5-6 M-377B

Figure 5.1 - H and D Word Definition

Gauge Line

H Word

D Word TI2986

Page 111: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TO STORE TOOL OFFSETS FROM THE PART PROGRAMTool offsets may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.

When G90 (absolute mode) is active, the R value programmed in the G10 block will overwritethe value contained in the selected tool offset register.

When G91 (incremental mode) is active, the R value programmed in the G10 block will addedto the value contained in the selected tool offset register.

Programming Format:

G10 L10 P_____ R_____ ;

G10 : Data input command

L10 : Set tool offset registers

P : Selects the tool offset register to be modified (1 through 200).

R : Tool offset value to be input

EXAMPLE 1: G10 G90 L10 P6 R6.85 ;

The value “6.85" will overwrite the value currently in tool offset #6

EXAMPLE 2: G10 G91 L10 P12 R.5 ;

The value “.5" will be added to the value currently in tool offset #12

M-377B 5-7

Page 112: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ACTIVATING TOOL OFFSETSTool length offsets are activated by a G43 command and a valid H word. Tool diameter off-

sets are activated by a G41 or G42 command and a valid D word. The numbers programmedwith the H and D words specify which tool offsets are to be used with the selected tool. Refer tothe sample programming segments shown below.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT #1

Tool Length Offset Only: N0120 G43 Z_ H12 ;

Block N0120, the value in tool offset register 12 is selected for tool length compensation.The tool offset is activated and the machine performs a compensated move to the Zaxis coordinate.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT #2

- NOTE -In block N0270, the control only requires a move on the X OR Y axis to activatetool diameter compensation. A move on both axes is allowed, but not required.

Tool Length and Diameter Offsets: N0260 G43 Z_ H7 ;N0270 (G41 or G42) X_ Y_ D8 ;

Block N0260, the value in tool offset register 7 is selected for tool length compensation.The tool offset is activated and the machine performs a compensated move to the Zaxis coordinate.

Block N0270, the value in tool offset register 8 is selected for tool diameter compensa-tion. The tool offset is activated and the machine performs a compensated move to theX and Y axis coordinates.

When a tool offset is programmed in a block containing axis motion, the tool offset motion iscomputed with the programmed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move directly to the cor-rected axis position at the programmed feedrate.

When a tool offset is programmed in a block without axis motion, the tool offset move will oc-cur in the next block containing axis motion. The tool offset motion is computed with the pro-grammed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move directly to the corrected axis position at theprogrammed feedrate.

CANCELING TOOL OFFSETS“D00" or the G40 command is used to cancel the active tool diameter offset (D word). The

next programmed X or Y axis movement will cancel the tool diameter offset and move the spin-dle centerline to the programmed X or Y axis position.

“H00" or the G49 command is used to cancel the active tool length offset (H word). The nextprogrammed Z axis movement will cancel the tool length offset and move the spindle face to theprogrammed Z axis position.

Tool offsets are also canceled when the Reset key is pressed or the machine is powereddown.

5-8 M-377B

Page 113: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 5-9

Page 114: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

5-10 M-377B

Page 115: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 6 - STANDARD MILLINGINTRODUCTION

Standard milling consists of programming milling tools “point to point”, with or without cuttercompensation.

Refer to the following chapters for information on automatic cycles:

Chapter 7 - Pocket MillingChapter 8 - Drilling CyclesChapter 9 - Boring CyclesChapter 10 - Tapping Cycles

The method of programming will vary, depending on whether absolute programming (G90) orincremental programming (G91) is used. All sample programs in this chapter are written for ab-solute programming.

G90/G91 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G90 commands absolute programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation to theX, Y, and Z axis zero positions. G90 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G91command.

G91 commands incremental programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation tothe current axis positions. G91 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G90 com-mand.

COMPENSATION FACTORSTool diameter compensation factors consist of compensation codes and tool offsets. The ma-

chine control shifts the actual position of the cutting tool using the programmed compensationcommand (G41 or G42) and the active tool offset to position the cutting edge of the tool at thedesired position to machine the workpiece.

TOOL COMPENSATION

Tool compensation identifies the direction of motion of the tool relative to the workpiece. Thisinformation allows the control to compensate properly for the diameter of the cutting tool. Theprogrammer writes the part program such that the centerline of the tool corresponds to the ma-chined surface of the workpiece.

G41 Cutter Left of WorkpieceWhen the spindle is rotating in the forward direction (M03 active), G41 will be used for

climb-milling. When the spindle is rotating in the reverse direction (M04 active), G41 will beused for conventional milling.

G42 Cutter Right of WorkpieceWhen the spindle is rotating in the forward direction (M03 active), G42 will be used for

conventional milling. When the spindle is rotating in the reverse direction (M04 active), G42will be used for climb-milling.

Refer to “Chapter 2 - Tool Compensation” for additional information.

M-377B 6-1

Page 116: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL OFFSET COMPENSATION

Length CompensationTool length compensation is programmed

through the use of a G43 command and an Hword. The H word is has a valid range from “H0"to ”H200". Decimal point programming is not al-lowed with the H word. Programming an “H0" or aG49 command will cancel the active tool lengthoffset. Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection andOffsets” for additional information.

Diameter CompensationTool diameter compensation is programmed

through the use of a G41 or G42 command and aD word. The D word is has a valid range from“D0" to ”D200". Decimal point programming is notallowed with the D word. Programming a “D0" or aG40 command cancels the active tool diameteroffset. Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection andOffsets” for additional information.

PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)

In this sample program, the workpiece shown in Figure 6.2 will be machined as follows:

Sequence 1: Mill Outside ProfileTool Type: 1 inch Dia. Roughing End Mill (HSS)Tool #: 4

Sequence 2: Mill Cast PocketTool Type: 1 inch Dia. Roughing End Mill (HSS)Tool #: 4

Sequence 3: Mill Horizontal Slot in FaceTool Type: .5 x 3.0 inch Dia Side Mill CutterTool #: 5

G90 (absolute programming) and G94 (inch/minute feed) are the power-up defaults and areactive for this example.

The corner of the workpiece is set to X0,Y0 and the surface of the workpiece is set to Z0through the use of the G54 work coordinate system. Refer to “Chapter 4 - Work Coordinate Sys-tems” for additional information on the programmable work coordinate systems.

The sample program segment begins on page 6-4. Each tool sequence in the programmingsegment is listed on a separate page with an illustration that shows the start point and end pointcoordinates, as well as any other relevant coordinate positions.

6-2 M-377B

Figure 6.1 - H and D Word Definitions

Z AxisWork Shift

H Word

Z Home

Shifted Z0

D Word

Machine Table

Z Axis shown at “Z0.”with tool length offsetactive.

TI4093

Page 117: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B 6-3

Figure 6.2 - Sample Workpiece Dimensions

10.000

1.0001.5001.7502.500

5.000

.500

.500

.500

4.000

2.000

8.000

9.500

19.000

22.500

23.000

NOTE: All dimensions shown in inches.

X0. Y0.

.5” Radius2 Places

1” Radius2 Places

TI3003A

Page 118: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Sample Program Segment.

N90 M06 T4 ; Tool Change Sequence

N100 G00 G90 X-1. Y-.5 ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning,Rapid to X-1. Y-.5,

N110 G43 H3 Z-2.5 S267 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Compensation using Offset #3,Rapid to Z Start Point,Spindle Forward 267 RPM, Coolant ON

N130 G01 G42 X-.75 Y.5 D4 F8. ; Activate Tool Diameter Compensation using Offset #4,Feed to X & Y Start Point (Figure 6.3), 8 in/min Feedrate

N140 X22. ; Feed to X22. Y.5

N150 G03 X22.5 Y1. R.5 ; Circular Interpolation, .5 Inch Radius

N160 G01 Y9. ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to X22. Y9.

N170 G03 X22. Y9.5 R.5 ; Circular Interpolation, .5 Radius

N180 G01 X.5 ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to X.5 Y9.5

N190 G01 Y-.75 ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to X.5 Y-.75

N200 G00 Z.1 ; Rapid Tool above Workpiece Surface

(Continued on next page)

6-4 M-377B

Figure 6.3 - Sample Workpiece:External Profile Tool Path

X-.75 Y.5Start Point

X.5 Y-.75End Point TI3004

Page 119: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

N210 X5.5 Y2.25 ; Rapid to X and Y Entry Position (Figure 6.4)

N220 Z-1.5 ; Rapid to Z-1.5

N230 G01 Z-1.75 F8. ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to Depth, 8 in/min Feedrate

N240 X5.25 Y2. ; Feed to Start Point of Cut

N250 X5. ; Feed to X5.

N260 G02 X4. Y3. R1. ; Circular Interpolation, 1 Inch Radius

N270 G01 Y7. ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to Y7.

N280 G02 X5. Y8. R1. ; Circular Interpolation, 1 Inch Radius

N290 G01 X18. ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to X18.

N300 G02 X19. Y7. R1. ; Circular Interpolation, 1 Inch Radius

N310 G01 Y3. ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to Y3.

N320 G02 X18. Y2. R1. ; Circular Interpolation, 1 Inch Radius

N330 G01 X5. ; Linear Interpolation, Feed to X5.

N340 X4.75 Y2.25 ; Move to Clear Workpiece on X and Y Axes

(Continued on next page)

M-377B 6-5

Figure 6.4 - Sample Workpiece:Pocket Profile Tool Path

X4.75 Y2.25Exit Position

X5. Y2.End Point of Cut

X5.5 Y2.25Entry Position

X4.75 Y2.25Start Point of Cut TI3005

Page 120: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

N350 M06 T5 ; Tool Change Sequence

N360 G00 G90 X-1.25 Y11.25 ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning,Rapid to X-1.25 Y11.25,

N370 G43 H5 Z-1.5 S89 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #5,Rapid to Z Start Point,Spindle Forward 89 RPM, Coolant ON

N390 G01 G42 X1. Y11.125 D6 F4. ; Linear Interpolation, Activate Tool Diameter Offset #6,Feed to X & Y Start Point (Figure 6.5), 4 in/min Feedrate

N400 Y-1.125 ; Feed to X1. Y-1.125

N410 G00 Z.1 ; Rapid Tool above Workpiece Surface

.

.

6-6 M-377B

Figure 6.5 - Sample Workpiece:Horizontal Slot Tool Path

X1 Y11.125Start Point

X1 Y-1.125End Point TI3006

Page 121: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 6-7

Page 122: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

6-8 M-377B

Page 123: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 7 - POCKET MILLINGINTRODUCTION

The pocket milling codes described in this chapter allow the programmer to define a circularor rectangular pocket to be milled. The appropriate code is programmed with data words thatspecify the necessary information to properly machine the pocket.

- NOTE -All references to conventional milling and climb-milling are based on forward rota-tion of the milling cutter (M03 or M13 active).

POCKET MILLING G CODES- NOTE -

Refer to “Pocket Milling M Codes”, page 7-2, for the programming codes to beused to program pocket milling if the machine is equipped with the tool probe op-tion.

Four G codes are used to program pocket milling if the machine is NOT equipped with thetool probe option. Refer to Figure 7.1 .

G12 - Circular Pocket, Clockwise Motion (Conventional Milling)G13 - Circular Pocket, Counterclockwise Motion (Climb-Milling)G71 - Rectangular Pocket, Clockwise Motion (Conventional Milling)G72 - Rectangular Pocket, Counterclockwise Motion (Climb-Milling)

M-377B 7-1

Figure 7.1 - Pocket Milling G Code Definitions

G12 CircularPocket Milling

TI4621

M03/M13Active

G13 CircularPocket Milling

M03/M13Active

G71 RectangularPocket Milling

G72 RectangularPocket Milling

ClockwiseTool Path

(Conventional Milling)

CounterclockwiseTool Path

(Climb-Milling)

ClockwiseTool Path

(Conventional Milling)

CounterclockwiseTool Path

(Climb-Milling)

Page 124: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

POCKET MILLING M CODES- NOTE -

Refer to “Pocket Milling G Codes”, page 7-1, for the programming codes to beused to program pocket milling if the machine is NOT equipped with the tool probeoption.

Four M codes are used to program pocket milling if the machine is equipped with the toolprobe option. Refer to Figure 7.2 .

M100 - Circular Pocket, Clockwise Motion (Conventional Milling)M101 - Circular Pocket, Counterclockwise Motion (Climb-Milling)M102 - Rectangular Pocket, Clockwise Motion (Conventional Milling)M103 - Rectangular Pocket, Counterclockwise Motion (Climb-Milling)

7-2 M-377B

Figure 7.2 - Pocket Milling M Code Definitions

M100 CircularPocket Milling

TI4621

M03/M13Active

M101 CircularPocket Milling

M03/M13Active

M102 RectangularPocket Milling

M103 RectangularPocket Milling

ClockwiseTool Path

(Conventional Milling)

CounterclockwiseTool Path

(Climb-Milling)

ClockwiseTool Path

(Conventional Milling)

CounterclockwiseTool Path

(Climb-Milling)

Page 125: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL OFFSETS FOR POCKET MILLING- NOTE -

Regardless of which tool offset memory is active (B or C), the D word will be usedin the pocket milling data block to call the tool radius value.

TOOL OFFSET MEMORY B

If Tool Offset Memory B is active, the following offset registers are available:

D Word (Diameter):GeometryWear

Load the tool radius value in an unused wear offset register. The D word in the pocket mill-ing data block will be used call the tool radius value.

TOOL OFFSET MEMORY C [Option]

If Tool Offset Memory C is active, the following offset registers are available:

D Word (Diameter):GeometryWear

H Word (Length)GeometryWear

Load the tool radius value in an unused H wear offset register. The D word in the pocketmilling data block will be used call the tool radius value.

M-377B 7-3

Page 126: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CIRCULAR POCKET MILLINGCircular pocket milling can be used to rough out a pocket or perform a finish pass on a

pocket that was previously roughed out.

Feed the tool to the desired Z axis depth at the center of the pocket before commanding thepocket milling G code or M code.

The tool will return to the center of the pocket after the pocket has been milled.

ROUGH POCKET

Programming FormatsG(12 or 13) I__ K__ Q__ D__ F__ ; (Machine without tool probe option)

M(100 or 101) I__ K__ Q__ D__ F__ ; (Machine with tool probe option)

Data Word DefinitionsG12: Circular pocket, clockwise motion (conventional milling)G13: Circular pocket, counterclockwise motion (climb-milling)

M100: Circular pocket, clockwise motion (conventional milling)M101: Circular pocket, counterclockwise motion (climb-milling)

I: Start radius

K: Finish radius of the pocket

Q: Incremental distance between cutting passes (radius value)

D: Number for the offset register containing the tool radius

F: Cutting feedrate

Refer to Figure 7.3 .

7-4 M-377B

Figure 7.3 - Rough Circular Pocket Milling

Tool Path CenterlinesClockwise Motion

(Conventional Milling)

TI4622

K Word

Q Word

Q Word

I Word

Tool and Cutting PathsClockwise Motion

(Conventional Milling)

1st

Pass

2nd

Pass

3rd

Pass

4th

Pass

Page 127: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Sample Program Segment

- NOTE -The following program segment is written for a machine NOT equipped with thetool probe option.

Replace G12 with M100 to use this program segment on a machine equipped withthe tool probe option.

N2 (ROUGH POCKET .75 ENDMILL) ;

M6 T2 ; Tool Change Sequence

G0 G90 X3. Y-3. ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning, Position to Pocket Center

G43 H2 Z.1 S1200 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #2, Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 1200 rpm, Coolant ON

G1 Z-.375 F15. ; Feed to Depth

G12 I.4 K1.48 Q.5 D20 F20. ; Execute Circular Pocket Milling

G0 Z.1 ; Rapid Z Axis Clear of Workpiece

G91 G30 Z0 M19 ; Rapid to Tool Change Position, Orient Spindle

M01 ; Optional Stop

M-377B 7-5

Page 128: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SINGLE FINISH PASS

Programming FormatsG(12 or 13) I__ R__ D__ F__ ; (Machine without tool probe option)

M(100 or 101) I__ R__ D__ F__ ; (Machine with tool probe option)

Data Word Definitions

- NOTE -The value specified for the R word MUST be less than the finish radius of thepocket minus the tool radius. This will prevent the tool from engaging theworkpiece while moving at rapid traverse rate. Refer to the I word definition for thefinish radius of the pocket.

G12: Circular pocket, clockwise motion (conventional milling)G13: Circular pocket, counterclockwise motion (climb-milling)

M100: Circular pocket, clockwise motion (conventional milling)M101: Circular pocket, counterclockwise motion (climb-milling)

I: Finish radius of the pocket

R: Rapid-to-feed distance for approaching and exiting the cut.This distance is measured from the start point, which is the center of the pocket.

D: Number for the offset register containing the tool radius

F: Cutting feedrate

Refer to Figure 7.4 .

7-6 M-377B

Figure 7.4 - Finish Circular Pocket Milling

I Word

TI4623

Tool PathCenterline

StartPoint

Page 129: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Sample Program Segment

- NOTE -The following program segment is written for a machine NOT equipped with thetool probe option.

Replace G12 with M100 to use this program segment on a machine equipped withthe tool probe option.

N2 (FINISH POCKET .5 ENDMILL) ;

M6 T3 ; Tool Change Sequence

G0 G90 X3. Y-3. ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning, Position to Pocket Center

G43 H3 Z.1 S2500 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #3, Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 2500 rpm, Coolant ON

G1 Z-.375 F25. ; Feed to Depth

G12 I1.5 R1.25 D30 F25. ; Execute Circular Pocket Milling

G0 Z.1 ; Rapid Z Axis Clear of Workpiece

G91 G30 Z0 M19 ; Rapid to Tool Change Position, Orient Spindle

M01 ; Optional Stop

M-377B 7-7

Page 130: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

RECTANGULAR POCKET MILLINGRectangular pocket milling can be used to rough out a rectangular or square pocket.

Feed the tool to the desired Z axis depth at the center of the pocket before commanding thepocket milling G code or M code.

The tool will stop at the back of the pocket after the pocket has been completed. The X axiscoordinate of the end point will be equal to the X axis coordinate of the last cutting pass. The Yaxis coordinate of the end point will be equal to the Y axis coordinate of the start point.

ROUGH POCKET

Programming FormatsG(71 or 72) X__ Y__ Q__ D__ F__ ; (Machine without tool probe option)

M(102 or 103) X__ Y__ Q__ D__ F__ ; (Machine with tool probe option)

Data Word DefinitionsG71: Conventional milling, clockwise motionG72: Climb milling, counterclockwise motion

M102: Conventional milling, clockwise motionM103: Climb milling, counterclockwise motion

X: Length of the pocket on the X axis

Y: Length of the pocket on the Y axis

Q: Incremental distance between cutting passes

D: Number for the offset register containing the tool radius

F: Cutting feedrate

Refer to Figure 7.5 .

7-8 M-377B

Page 131: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Sample Program Segment

- NOTE -The following program segment is written for a machine NOT equipped with thetool probe option.

Replace G72 with M103 to use this program segment on a machine equipped withthe tool probe option.

N4 (.5 ENDMILL) ;

M6 T5 ; Tool Change Sequence

G0 G90 X2. Y-1. ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning, Position to Pocket Center

G43 H4 Z.1 S1500 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #3, Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 1500 rpm, Coolant ON

G1 Z-.1875 F20. ; Feed to Depth

G72 X5. Y3. Q.3 D15 F20. ; Execute Rectangular Pocket Milling

G0 Z.1 ; Rapid Z Axis Clear of Workpiece

G91 G30 Z0 M19 ; Rapid to Tool Change Position, Orient Spindle

M01 ; Optional Stop

M-377B 7-9

Figure 7.5 - Rectangular Pocket Milling: Tool Path Centerlines(8 Cutting Passes Shown)

TI4624

X Axis

Y Axis

X Word

Y WordQ Word

Q Word

StartPoint

EndPoint

Page 132: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

7-10 M-377B

Page 133: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 8 - DRILLING CYCLESINTRODUCTION

The control offers four distinct drilling cycles; two peck drilling cycles and two single pass drill-ing cycles. Each drilling cycle offers the programmer specific capabilities. The programmer willselect the appropriate drilling cycle based on the requirements of the job to be performed.

In a peck drilling cycle, the Z axis is reversed at prescribed intervals to provide for proper chipremoval. It is the programmer’s responsibility to make certain that the programmed parametersresult in a cycle that satisfactorily removes chips during the drilling operation.

In a single pass drilling cycle, the Z axis performs a continuous move to drill the workpiece. Itis the programmer’s responsibility to make certain that the programmed parameters result in acycle that performs the operation without overloading the tool. The Z axis is reversed after thedrilled hole has been completed.

The method of programming the drilling cycles will vary, depending on whether absolute pro-gramming (G90) or incremental programming (G91) is used. All sample programs in this chapterare written for absolute programming.

The tool position at the end of each drilling cycle is controlled by the part program through theuse of the G98 and G99 commands.

G90/G91 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G90 or G91 can be commanded before a drilling cycle is executed or in the samedata block as the drilling cycle.

G90 commands absolute programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation to theX, Y, and Z axis zero positions. G90 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G91command.

G91 commands incremental programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation tothe current axis positions. G91 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G90 com-mand.

G98/G99 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G98 or G99 can be commanded before a drilling cycle is executed or in the samedata block as the drilling cycle.

G98 commands the tool to retract to the start point of the cycle when the drilling cycle hasbeen completed. G98 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G99 command.

G99 commands the tool to retract to the return point of the cycle when the drilling cycle hasbeen completed. G99 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G98 command.

Refer to the illustrations shown with each of the drilling cycle descriptions to determine the lo-cation of the start point and return point of the cycle.

M-377B 8-1

Page 134: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CANCELING DRILLING CYCLESDrilling cycles MUST be canceled immediately after completion. If a drilling cycle is not can-

celed and axis motion is commanded, the axes will move to the new coordinate position and ex-ecute the active drilling cycle.

Program a G80 command in a data block by itself immediately after the last data block to beacted on by the drilling cycle. The G80 command block will be immediately after the data blockcommanding the drilling cycle EXCEPT when multiple holes will be drilled. Refer to Drilling Multi-ple Holes, beginning on page 8-9.

PECK DRILLING CYCLESThe G73 and G83 Peck Drilling Cycles use constant depth increments for the cutting in-feed

distance. The G73 cycle is termed a “high speed” cycle due to the short retract distance aftereach drilling pass, as shown in Figure 8.1 . In comparison, the G83 cycle retracts the drill to thereturn point after each drilling pass, as shown in Figure 8.2 . Each cycle offers advantages andshould be selected according to the requirements of the job.

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

[G73 or G83] X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 Q2.4 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

[G73 or G83] X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 Q3.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG73 COMMAND G code for High Speed Peck Drilling Cycle.

G83 COMMAND G code for Peck Drilling Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the drilled hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thedrilled hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the drilled hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thedrilled hole is “Y3.0".

8-2 M-377B

Page 135: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the drilled hole is 2.125inches.

Q WORD Specifies the depth of cut per pass in the Z direction as an incrementalvalue. In the sample program segment, the depth of cut per pass is .5inches.

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.Refer to “R”, in Figures 8.1 and 8.2 . In the sample program segment,the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the drilling cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the drilling cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the drilling cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the drilling cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 3.67 inches per minute.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : .375 inchTool Offset #: 9

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 3/8" hole will bedrilled to a depth of 2.125 inches. Refer to Figure 8.1 .

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

N220 M06 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N230 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N240 G43 H9 Z1. S611 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #9,Rapid to Z Start Position,Spindle Forward 611 RPM, Coolant ON

N250 [G73 or G83] G98 Z-2.125 R.1 Q.5 F3.67 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G73 (G83) Cycle

N260 G80; Cancel Cycle

N270 M06 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

M-377B 8-3

Page 136: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G73 CYCLE (Figure 8.1)

During execution of the cycle, the series of Z axis moves is as follows:

1. The drill rapids to the start point.

2. From the start point, the drill rapids to the return point.

3. The drill feeds in “Q” amount.

4. The drill rapids up the retract increment.

5. The drill feeds in “Q+Retract Increment”.

6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the last pass. On the last pass, the drill feeds in to thefinal hole depth, then rapid retracts to either the start point or the return point, dependingon whether G98 or G99 is active. Refer to the description of G98/G99 programming, onpage 8-1.

8-4 M-377B

Figure 8.1 - G73 Peck Drilling Cycle

Z1.000Start Point

R.100Return Point

Q.500In-Feed

Retract IncrementSet by Parameter #5114

.900

Z0

Z-2.125Z Word

TI2980

+Z

Page 137: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G83 CYCLE (Figure 8.2)

During execution of the cycle, the series of Z axis moves is as follows:

1. The drill rapids to the start point.

2. From the start point, the drill rapids to the return point.

3. The drill feeds in “Q” amount.

4. The drill rapids up the return point.

5. The drill rapids down to the “Rapid to Feed” point.

6. The drill feeds in “Q+Rapid to Feed”.

7. Steps 4, 5, and 6 are repeated until the last pass. On the last pass, the drill feeds in tothe final hole depth, then rapid retracts to either the start point or the return point, de-pending on whether G98 or G99 is active. Refer to the description of G98/G99 program-ming, on page 8-1.

M-377B 8-5

Figure 8.2 - G83 Peck Drilling Cycle

Z1.000Start Point

R.100Return Point

Q.500In-Feed

Rapid to Feed PointSet by Parameter #5115

.900

Z0

Z-2.125Z Word

TI2980

+Z

Page 138: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SINGLE PASS DRILLING CYCLESThe G81 and G82 Single Pass Drilling Cycles function in a similar manner, with the exception

of a programmable dwell at the bottom of the hole in the G82 cycle. The G81 cycle is typicallyused when drilling completely through the workpiece, as shown in Figure 8.3 . The G82 cycle istypically used for drilling blind holes, due to the fact that the programmable dwell allows forbetter clean up at the bottom of the drilled hole. Each cycle should be selected according to therequirements of the job.

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

The P data word (dwell command) is NOT used with the G81 cycle.

Inch Programming:

[G81 or G82] X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 P7 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

[G81 or G82] X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 P7 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG81 COMMAND G code for Single Pass Drilling Cycle.

G82 COMMAND G code for Single Pass Drilling Cycle with Programmable Dwell.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the drilled hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thedrilled hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the drilled hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thedrilled hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the drilled hole is 2.125inches.

P WORD Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the drilled hole. “P0" is assumed ifthe P data word is not programmed. Decimal point programming is NOTallowed with the P data word. The control assumes decimal point place-ment as P5.3 . Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zerosMUST be programmed. Refer to the following examples:

P300 = 0.3 Second DwellP6500 = 6.5 Second Dwell

8-6 M-377B

Page 139: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.Refer to “R”, in Figures 8.3 and 8.4 . In the sample program segment,the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the drilling cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the drilling cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the drilling cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the drilling cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 3.67 inches per minute.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : .375 inchTool Offset #: 11

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 3/8" hole will bedrilled to a depth of 2.125 inches. Refer to Figures 8.3 and 8.4 .

G90 (absolute positioning), G94 (inch/minute feed), and G98 (return to start point) are thepower-up defaults and are active for this example.

- NOTE -The P word (programmable dwell) will only be effective if the G82 cycle is used.The P word will be ignored by the G81 cycle.

Sample Program Segment:

.

N220 M06 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N230 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N240 G43 H11 Z1. S611 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #11,Rapid to Z Start Position,Spindle Forward 611 RPM, Coolant ON

N250 [G81 or G82] G98 X5. Y3. Z-2.125 R.1 P500 F3.67 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define G81 (G82) Cycle and Drill Hole

N260 G80; Cancel Cycle

N270 M06 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

M-377B 8-7

Page 140: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

8-8 M-377B

Figure 8.3 - G81 Single Pass Drilling Cycle

.900

Z1.000Start Point

R.100Return Point

Z-2.125Z Word

+Z

TI2981

Z0

Figure 8.4 - G82 Single Pass Drilling Cycle

.900

Z1.000Start Point

R.100Return Point

Z-2.125Z Word

+Z

TI2982

Z0

Page 141: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DRILLING MULTIPLE HOLESAll of the drilling cycles described in this chapter can be used to drill multiple holes. As men-

tioned in “Canceling Drilling Cycles”, page 8-2, a drilling cycle will remain active until canceledby a G80 command. Once a drilling cycle is commanded, it is only necessary to program X andY axis positions in subsequent data blocks to command the machine tool to execute the drillingcycle at each position. The G80 command is programmed after all holes for the current toolhave been completed.

- CAUTION -Exercise care when selecting the start point for the cycle and the return code(G98/G99). If the workpiece has ribs or other protrusions that extend above Z0and an incorrect retract point is selected, the tool could strike the workpiece.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool 11 Dia.: .375 inchTool 11 Offset #: 11Tool 12 Dia.: .625 inchTool 12 Offset #: 12

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece. Nine .375 dia. holes will bedrilled to a depth of 3.265 inches. Six .625 dia. holes will be drilled through the workpiece. Referto Figure 8.5, on page 8-11.

G90 (absolute positioning), G94 (inch/minute feed), and G98 (return to start point) are thepower-up defaults and are active for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

N210 M6 T11 ; Tool Change Sequence

N220 G00 G90 X.5 Y-3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N230 G43 H11 Z1. S611 M13 ; Move to Z Axis Start Point and Activate Tool LengthOffset #11, Spindle Forward 611 RPM, Coolant ON

N240 G82 G98 Z-3.265 R.1 P500 F3.67 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define G82 Cycle and Drill Hole #1

N250 Y-6. ; Drill Hole #2

N260 Y-9. ; Drill Hole #3

N270 X6.125 ; Drill Hole #4

N280 Y-6. ; Drill Hole #5

N290 Y-3. ; Drill Hole #6

N300 X10.75 Drill Hole #7

N310 Y-6. ; Drill Hole #8

N320 Y-9. ; Drill Hole #9

N330 G80; Cancel Cycle

N340 M6 T12 ; Tool Change Sequence

N350 G00 G90 X4. Y-1.5 ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

M-377B 8-9

Page 142: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

N360 G43 H12 Z1. S367 M13 ; Move to Z Axis Start Point and Activate Tool LengthOffset #12, Spindle Forward 367 RPM, Coolant ON

N370 G81 G99 Z-2.814 R.1 F3.3 ; Establish G99 Mode,Define G81 Cycle and Drill Hole #10

N380 Y-6. ; Drill Hole #11

N390 Y-10.5 ; Drill Hole #12

N400 X8.25 ; Drill Hole #13

N410 Y-6. ; Drill Hole #14

N420 Y-1.5 ; Drill Hole #15

N430 G80 ; Cancel Cycle

N440 M6 T13 ; Tool Change Sequence.

PROGRAM NOTES

1. “M6 T_” Tool Change Sequence (Blocks N210, N340, and N440)

The T word defines the tool to be used for the current operation.

2. G98 Move to Start Point (Block N240)

The G98 command was used with the G82 cycle to move the tool to the start point(Z1.0) after each drilled hole. If G99 (Tool to Return Point) had been used, the toolwould have impacted the ribs on the workpiece when moving to holes 4 and 7.

3. G99 Move to Return Point (Block N370)

The G99 command was used with the G81 cycle to move the tool to the return point(Z0.1) after each drilled hole. This was possible due to the fact that no interference ex-ists between the .625 diameter holes.

8-10 M-377B

Page 143: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B 8-11

Figure 8.5 - Sample Workpiece: Drilling MultipleHoles with Drilling Cycles

10.500

TI2983A

9.000

6.000

3.000

1.500

.500

4.000

6.125

8.250

10.750

X0. Y0.

#10

#1

#2

#3

#11

#12

#6

#5

#4

#15

#14

#13

#7

#8

#9

3/8” Diameter(9 Places)

5/8” Diameter(6 Places)

Note: All dimensions are shown in inches.

3.265 2.814

Z1.0 Start Point

Z0.1 Return PointZ ZERO

.750

Page 144: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

8-12 M-377B

Page 145: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 9 - BORING CYCLESINTRODUCTION

The control offers six boring cycles. Each boring cycle offers the programmer specific capabil-ities. The programmer will select the appropriate boring cycle based on the requirements of thejob to be performed.

The method of programming the boring cycles will vary, depending on whether absolute pro-gramming (G90) or incremental programming (G91) is used. All sample programs in this chapterare written for absolute programming.

The tool position at the end of each boring cycle is controlled by the part program through theuse of the G98 and G99 commands.

G90/G91 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G90 or G91 can be commanded before a boring cycle is executed or in the samedata block as the boring cycle.

G90 commands absolute programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation to theX, Y, and Z axis zero positions. G90 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G91command.

G91 commands incremental programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation tothe current axis positions. G91 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G90 com-mand.

G98/G99 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G98 or G99 can be commanded before a boring cycle is executed or in the samedata block as the boring cycle.

G98 commands the tool to retract to the start point of the cycle when the boring cycle hasbeen completed. G98 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G99 command.

G99 commands the tool to retract to the return point of the cycle when the boring cycle hasbeen completed. G99 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G98 command.

Refer to the illustrations shown with each of the boring cycle descriptions to determine the lo-cation of the start point and return point of the cycle. Any exceptions will be noted in the descrip-tions for the individual cycles.

M-377B 9-1

Page 146: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CANCELING BORING CYCLESBoring cycles MUST be canceled immediately after completion. If a boring cycle is not can-

celed and axis motion is commanded, the axes will move to the new coordinate position and ex-ecute the active boring cycle.

Program a G80 command in a data block by itself immediately after the last data block to beacted on by the boring cycle. The G80 command block will be immediately after the data blockcommanding the boring cycle EXCEPT when multiple holes will be bored. Refer to Boring Multi-ple Holes, beginning on page 9-25.

GENERAL DESCRIPTIONSG76 FINE BORING CYCLE

The G76 cycle stops the spindle at a specific orientation at the end of the boring pass.Refer to Orientation Angle, page 9-3. The tool moves the tool away from the surface of thebore, and retracts the tool from the bore. Refer to page 9-5 for a complete description of theG76 Fine Boring Cycle.

G85 BORING CYCLE

The G85 cycle bores to depth and feeds out at the programmed feedrate. Spindle motionis continuous. Refer to page 9-9 for a complete description of the G85 Boring Cycle.

G86 BORING CYCLE

The G86 cycle bores to depth at the programmed feedrate, spindle rotation stops, and thetool is retracted at rapid traverse rate. Refer to page 9-12 for a complete description of theG86 Boring Cycle.

G87 BACK BORING CYCLE

The G87 cycle positions the tool on the X and Y axes and stops the spindle at a specificorientation. Refer to Orientation Angle, page 9-3. The tool moves the programmed shiftamount and moves to the programmed return point at rapid traverse. The tool moves theprogrammed shift amount and clockwise spindle rotation begins at the programmed spindlespeed. Machining is performed up to the programmed Z depth (+Z movement).

Spindle rotation stops at a specific orientation at the end of the boring pass, moves thetool away from the surface of the bore, and retracts the tool from the bore at rapid traverserate. Refer to page 9-15 for a complete description of the G87 Boring Cycle.

G88 BORING CYCLE

The G88 cycle bores to depth at the programmed feedrate; then, spindle rotation stops.The operator manually retracts the tool until it reaches the return point. The tool is then au-tomatically moved at rapid traverse rate to the start point of the boring cycle. Refer to page9-19 for a complete description of the G88 Boring Cycle.

G89 BORING CYCLE

The G89 cycle bores to depth, dwells at the bottom of the bore for a specified amount oftime, and feeds out at the programmed feedrate. Spindle motion is continuous. Refer topage 9-22 for a complete description of the G89 Boring Cycle.

9-2 M-377B

Page 147: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ORIENTATION ANGLE- CAUTION -

When programming cycles that perform an oriented spindle stop, the pro-grammer MUST be aware of the orientation of the boring bar in the tool holder.Performing an incorrect offset move after an oriented spindle stop could dam-age the tool or workpiece.

During an oriented spindle stop, the machine spindle always stops at the same angle of orien-tation. The orientation of the boring bar in the tool holder will determine the required direction forthe offset moves programmed in the G76 and G87 boring cycles.

PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

Machines Equipped with Hardinge / Fanuc System II Control

Parameter 2, bits 4 (PMXY1) and 5 (PMXY2), and the active plane selection commanddetermine the axis and direction of the shift when an offset value (Q word) is read froma G76 or G87 boring cycle. G17 is the power-up default plane selection.

Machines Equipped with Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc 18-MC Control

Parameter 5101, bits 4 (RD1) and 5 (RD2), and the active plane selection command de-termine the axis and direction of the shift when an offset value (Q word) is read from aG76 or G87 boring cycle. G17 is the power-up default plane selection.

Refer to the following table to determine which parameter settings and plane selection com-mand should be used:

Settings for Bits 5 & 4 Plane Selection

Bit 5 Bit 4 G17 G18 G19

0 0 +X +Z +Y

0 1 -X -Z -Y

1 0 +Y +X +Z

1 1 -Y -X -Z

M-377B 9-3Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 148: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ESTABLISHING THE OFFSET AXIS AND DIRECTION

- NOTE -Refer to the table on the previous page to determine which parameter settings andplane selection command should be used.

1. Verify the parameter values and adjust, as needed.

Example 1: Bit 5 = 0Bit 4 = 0Plane = G17

Offset move to clear workpiece will be in the +X direction.Offset move to engage workpiece will be in the -X direction

Example 2: Bit 5 = 0Bit 4 = 1Plane = G19

Offset move to clear workpiece will be in the -Y direction.Offset move to engage workpiece will be in the +Y direction

Example 3: Bit 5 = 1Bit 4 = 1Plane = G18

Offset move to clear workpiece will be in the -X direction.Offset move to engage workpiece will be in the +X direction

2. Program the appropriate plane selection command.

9-4 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 149: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G76 FINE BORING CYCLEThe G76 Fine Boring Cycle uses a retract feature to eliminate scoring of the bore during tool

retraction. Refer to Figure 9.1 .

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

G76 X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 P8.0 Q2.4 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

G76 X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 P8.0 Q3.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG76 COMMAND G code for the G76 Fine Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thebored hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thebored hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is 2.125inches.

M-377B 9-5Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 150: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

P WORD Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the bored hole. “P0" is assumed ifthe P data word is not programmed. Decimal point programming is NOTallowed with the P data word. The control assumes decimal point place-ment as P5.3 . Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zerosMUST be programmed. Refer to the following examples:

P300 = 0.3 Second DwellP6500 = 6.5 Second Dwell

Q WORD Specifies the incremental tool shift value after the boring pass has beencompleted. In the sample program segment, the incremental tool shift is.05 inches.

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.In the sample program segment, the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the boring cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the boring cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 1.50 inches per minute.

9-6 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 151: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G76 CYCLE (Figure 9.1)

During execution of the cycle, the series of axis movements is as follows:

1. The boring bar rapids to the start point. [View A]

2. From the start point, the boring bar rapids to the return point. [View A]

3. The boring bar feeds to depth (Z word). [View B]

4. The boring bar dwells at the end of the bore. Time established by P word.

5. The spindle stops at the orientation angle and the boring bar moves away from the borean incremental distance equal to the value of the programmed Q word. [View C]

M-377B 9-7Revised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.1 - G76 Fine Boring Cycle:Tool Movement and Data Words

ReturnPoint

StartPoint

Z0

A B

C D

Directionof

Motion

Depthof Bore

(Z Word)

Directionof

Motion

Q Word

Directionof

Motion

ReturnPoint

StartPoint

TI3015

Page 152: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

6. The boring bar rapid retracts to either the start point or the return point, depending onwhether G98 or G99 is active. [View D] Refer to the description of G98/G99 program-ming, on page 9-1.

7. The boring bar moves horizontally to align the centerline of the tool with the centerline ofthe bored hole. [View A]

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : 1.350 inches

In this sample program segment, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 1.350 inchdiameter hole will be bored to a depth of 2.125 inches.

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

The P word establishes a 1 second dwell at the end of the bore.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N250 G43 H7 Z4. S150 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #7,Rapid to Z Start Position,Spindle Forward 150 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G76 G98 Z-2.125 R.1 P1000 Q.05 F1.5 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G76 Cycle

N270 G80; Cancel G76 Cycle

N280 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

9-8 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 153: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G85 BORING CYCLE

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

G85 X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

G85 X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG85 COMMAND G code for the G85 Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thebored hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thebored hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is 2.125inches.

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.In the sample program segment, the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the boring cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the boring cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 1.50 inches per minute.

M-377B 9-9Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 154: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G85 CYCLE (Figure 9.2)

During execution of the cycle, the series of axis movements is as follows:

1. The boring bar rapids to the start point. [View A]

2. From the start point, the boring bar rapids to the return point. [View A]

3. The boring bar feeds to depth (Z word). [View B]

4. The boring bar feeds up to the return point. [View C]

5. If G98 is active, the boring bar rapids to the start point.

If G99 is active, the boring bar remains at the return point.

9-10 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.2 - G85 Boring Cycle:Tool Movement and Data Words

StartPoint

Directionof

Motion

Directionof

Motion

ReturnPoint

ReturnPointZ0

Z Word

TI3016

A B C

Page 155: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : 1.350 inches

In this sample program segment, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 1.350 inchdiameter hole will be bored to a depth of 2.125 inches.

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N250 G43 H8 Z4. S150 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #8,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 150 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G85 G98 Z-2.125 R.1 F1.5 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G85 Cycle

N270 G80; Cancel G85 Cycle

N280 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

M-377B 9-11Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 156: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G86 BORING CYCLE

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

G86 X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

G86 X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG86 COMMAND G code for the G86 Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thebored hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thebored hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is 2.125inches.

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.In the sample program segment, the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the boring cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the boring cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 1.50 inches per minute.

9-12 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 157: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G86 CYCLE (Figure 9.3)

During execution of the cycle, the series of axis movements is as follows:

1. The boring bar rapids to the start point. [View A]

2. From the start point, the boring bar rapids to the return point. [View A]

3. The boring bar feeds to depth (Z word). [View B]

4. Spindle rotation stops.

5. If G98 is active, the boring bar rapids to the start point. [View C]

If G99 is active, the boring bar rapids to the return point. [View C]

M-377B 9-13Revised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.3 - G86 Boring Cycle:Tool Movement and Data Words

Directionof

Motion

Directionof

Motion

StartPoint

ReturnPointZ0

Z Word

StartPoint

ReturnPoint

A B C

TI3017

Page 158: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : 1.350 inches

In this sample program segment, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 1.350 inchdiameter hole will be bored to a depth of 2.125 inches.

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N250 G43 H13 Z4. S150 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #13,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 150 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G86 G98 Z-2.125 R.1 F1.5 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G86 Cycle

N270 G80; Cancel G86 Cycle

N280 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

9-14 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 159: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G87 BORING CYCLE- NOTE -

The G99 command is not effective for the G87 boring cycle.

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

G87 X±2.4 Y2.4 Z±2.4 P8.0 Q2.4 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

G87 X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 P8.0 Q3.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG87 COMMAND G code for the G87 Back Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thebored hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thebored hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the absolute coordinate for the end of the bored hole, in refer-ence to Z0 (zero). In the sample program segment, the final depth of thebored hole is 2.0 inches.

P WORD Specifies the dwell at the end of the bored hole. “P0" is assumed if the Pdata word is not programmed. Decimal point programming is NOT al-lowed with the P data word. The control assumes decimal point place-ment as P5.3 . Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zerosMUST be programmed. Refer to the following examples:

P300 = 0.3 Second DwellP6500 = 6.5 Second Dwell

M-377B 9-15Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 160: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Q WORD Specifies the incremental tool shift value. In the sample program seg-ment, the incremental tool shift is .05 inches.

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.In the sample program segment, the distance is 2.7 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the boring cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the boring cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the back boring cycle. In the sample programsegment, the feedrate is 1.50 inches per minute.

9-16 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 161: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G87 CYCLE (Figure 9.4)

During execution of the cycle, the series of axis movements is as follows:

1. The boring bar rapids to the start point. [View A]

2. The boring bar shifts by Q amount. [View B]

3. The boring bar rapids to the return point. [View C]

4. The boring bar shifts by Q amount. [View D]

5. The boring bar feeds UP to depth (Z word). [View E]

6. The boring bar dwells at the end of the bore, time established by P word.

7. The spindle stops at the orientation angle and the boring bar moves away from the borean incremental distance equal to the value of the programmed Q word. [View F]

8. The boring bar rapid retracts to the start point. [View G]

9. The boring bar moves horizontally to align the centerline of the tool with the centerline ofthe bored hole. [View H]

M-377B 9-17Revised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.4 - G87 Boring Cycle:Tool Movement and Data Words

StartPoint

Directionof Motion

Q Word

ReturnPoint

Directionof

Motion

Directionof Motion

Directionof Motion

Directionof

Motion

Directionof Motion

Q Word

Directionof

Motion

ZWord

Z0

StartPoint

A B C D

E F G H

TI3018

Page 162: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : 1.350 inches

In this sample program segment, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 1.350 inchdiameter hole will be bored to a depth of 2.0 inches.

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

The P word establishes a 1 second dwell at the end of the bore.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N250 G43 H17 Z4. S150 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #17,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 150 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G87 G98 X5. Y3. Z-2. R-2.7 P1000 Q.1 F1.5 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G87 Cycle

N270 G80; Cancel G87 Cycle

N280 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

9-18 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 163: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G88 BORING CYCLE

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

G88 X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 P5.3 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

G88 X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 P5.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG88 COMMAND G code for the G88 Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thebored hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thebored hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is 2.125inches.

P WORD Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the bored hole. “P0" is assumed ifthe P data word is not programmed. Decimal point programming is NOTallowed with the P data word. The control assumes decimal point place-ment as P5.3 . Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zerosMUST be programmed. Refer to the following examples:

P300 = 0.3 Second DwellP6500 = 6.5 Second Dwell

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.In the sample program segment, the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the boring cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the boring cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 1.50 inches per minute.

M-377B 9-19Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 164: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G88 CYCLE (Figure 9.5)

During execution of the cycle, the series of axis movements is as follows:

1. The boring bar rapids to the start point. [View A]

2. From the start point, the boring bar rapids to the return point. [View A]

3. The boring bar feeds to depth (Z word). [View B]

4. At final depth:

If a dwell is programmed (P word), the spindle continues to rotate for the duration of thedwell, then stops.

If a dwell is NOT programmed, the spindle stops immediately.

5. Program execution stops.

6. The operator presses the Cycle Start push button to reinitiate program execution.

7. If G98 is active, the boring bar rapids to the start point.

If G99 is active, the boring bar rapids to the return point.

8. If another hole is to be bored:

a) The spindle begins rotating.

b) The boring bar rapids to the next hole and the boring cycle continues.

If another hole is NOT to be bored, the cycle will be canceled by a programmed G80and program execution will continue.

9-20 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.5 - G88 Boring Cycle:Tool Movement and Data Words

Directionof

Motion

Directionof

Motion

StartPoint

ReturnPointZ0

StartPoint

ReturnPoint

Z Word

A B C

TI3017

Page 165: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : 1.350 inches

In this sample program segment, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 1.350 inchdiameter hole will be bored to a depth of 2.125 inches.

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N250 G43 H20 Z4. S150 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #20,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 150 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G88 G98 X5. Y3. Z-2.125 P1500 R.1 F1.5 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G88 Cycle

N270 G80; Cancel G88 Cycle

N280 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

M-377B 9-21Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 166: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G89 BORING CYCLE

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

G89 X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 P8.0 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

G89 X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 P8.0 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG89 COMMAND G code for the G89 Boring Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thebored hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the bored hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thebored hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the bored hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the bored hole is 2.125inches.

P WORD Specifies the dwell at the bottom of the bored hole. “P0" is assumed ifthe P data word is not programmed. Decimal point programming is NOTallowed with the P data word. The control assumes decimal point place-ment as P5.3 . Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zerosMUST be programmed. Refer to the following examples:

P300 = 0.3 Second DwellP6500 = 6.5 Second Dwell

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.In the sample program segment, the distance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the boring cycle will be performed at eachlocation. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When ”K0." isprogrammed, the boring cycle data will be stored by the machine control,but the boring cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the boring cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 1.50 inches per minute.

9-22 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 167: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL MOVEMENT IN THE G89 CYCLE (Figure 9.6)

During execution of the cycle, the series of axis movements is as follows:

1. The boring bar rapids to the start point. [View A]

2. From the start point, the boring bar rapids to the return point. [View A]

3. The boring bar feeds to depth (Z word). [View B]

4. The boring bar dwells at the end of the bore. Time established by P word.

5. The boring bar feeds up to the return point. [View C]

6. If G98 is active, the boring bar rapids to the start point.

If G99 is active, the boring bar remains at the return point.

M-377B 9-23Revised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.6 - G89 Boring Cycle:Tool Movement and Data Words

Directionof

Motion

Directionof

Motion

StartPoint

ReturnPoint

ReturnPointZ0

Z Word

TI3016

A B C

Page 168: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : 1.350 inches

In this sample program segment, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a 1.350 inchdiameter hole will be bored to a depth of 2.125 inches.

G94 (inch/minute feed) and G98 (return to start point) are the power-up defaults and are ac-tive for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N250 G43 H8 Z4. S150 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #8,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 150 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G89 G98 Z-2.125 P500 R.1 F1.5 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define and Execute G89 Cycle

N270 G80; Cancel G89 Cycle

N280 M6 T_ ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

9-24 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 169: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

BORING MULTIPLE HOLESAll of the boring cycles described in this chapter can be used to bore multiple holes. As men-

tioned in “Canceling Boring Cycles”, page 9-2, a boring cycle will remain active until canceled bya G80 command. Once a boring cycle is commanded, it is only necessary to program X and Yaxis positions in subsequent data blocks to command the machine tool to execute the boring cy-cle at each position. The G80 command is programmed after all holes for the current tool havebeen completed.

- CAUTION -Exercise care when selecting the start point for the cycle and the return code(G98/G99). If the workpiece has ribs or other protrusions that extend above Z0and an incorrect retract point is selected, the tool could strike the workpiece.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool 11 Dia.: .500 inchTool 11 Offset #: 11Tool 12 Dia.: .750 inchTool 12 Offset #: 12

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece. Nine .500 diameter holeswill be bored to a depth of 3.265 inches. Six .750 diameter holes will be bored through theworkpiece. Refer to Figure 9.7, on page 9-27.

G90 (absolute positioning), G94 (inch/minute feed), and G98 (return to start point) are thepower-up defaults and are active for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N230 M6 T11 ; Tool Change Sequence

N240 G00 G90 X.5 Y-3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Start Po-sition

N250 G43 H11 Z1. S340 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #11,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 340 RPM, Coolant ON

N260 G89 G98 Z-3.265 R.1 P500 F1.7 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define G89 Cycle and Bore Hole #1

N270 Y-6. ; Bore Hole #2

N280 Y-9. ; Bore Hole #3

M-377B 9-25Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 170: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

N290 X6.125 ; Bore Hole #4

N300 Y-6. ; Bore Hole #5

N310 Y-3. ; Bore Hole #6

N320 X10.75 Bore Hole #7

N330 Y-6. ; Bore Hole #8

N340 Y-9. ; Bore Hole #9

N350 G80; Cancel G89 Cycle

N360 M6 T12 ; Tool Change Sequence

N370 G00 G90 X4. Y-1.5 ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N380 G43 H12 Z1. S280 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #12,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 280 RPM, Coolant ON

N390 G85 G99 Z-2.814 R.1 F2.0 ; Establish G99 Mode,Define G85 Cycle and Bore Hole #10

N400 Y-6. ; Bore Hole #11

N410 Y-10.5 ; Bore Hole #12

N420 X8.25 ; Bore Hole #13

N430 Y-6. ; Bore Hole #14

N440 Y-1.5 ; Bore Hole #15

N450 G80 ; Cancel G85 Cycle

N460 M6 T13 ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

SAMPLE PROGRAM NOTES

1. “M6 T_” Tool Change Sequence (Blocks N230, N360, and N460)

The T word defines the tool to be used for the current operation.

2. G98 Move to Start Point (Block N260)

The G98 command was used with the G89 cycle to move the tool to the start point(Z1.0) after each bored hole. If G99 (Tool to Return Point) had been used, the toolwould have impacted the ribs on the workpiece when moving to holes 4 and 7.

3. G99 Move to Return Point (Block N390)

The G99 command was used with the G85 cycle to move the tool to the return point(Z0.1) after each bored hole. This was possible due to the fact that no interference ex-ists between the .75 diameter holes.

9-26 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 171: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B 9-27Revised: May 7, 2003

Figure 9.7 - Sample Workpiece: Boring Multiple Holes

10.500

.500

4.000

6.125

8.250

10.750

X0. Y0.

9.000

6.000

3.000

1.500

½” Diameter(9 Places)

3/4” Diameter(6 Places)

#10

#1

#2

#3

#11

#12

#6

#5

#4

#15

#14

#7

#8

#9

#13

TI3020A

3.2652.814

Z1.0 Start Point

Z0.1 Return PointZ ZERO

.750

Note: All dimensions are shown in inches.

Page 172: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

9-28 M-377B

Page 173: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 10 - TAPPING CYCLESINTRODUCTION

The control offers two tapping cycles; the G84 tapping cycle and the G74 reverse tapping cy-cle. The G84 tapping cycle is used for right-hand taps and the G74 reverse tapping cycle isused for left-hand taps. Both tapping cycles allow the programmer to specify conventional tap-ping vs rigid tapping. The programmer will select the appropriate method of tapping based onthe requirements of the job to be performed. Refer to Tapping Modes, below.

When programming single pass tapping, the Z axis performs a continuous move to tap theworkpiece. It is the programmer’s responsibility to make certain that the programmed parametersresult in a cycle that performs the operation without overloading the tool. The Z axis and spindleare reversed after the tap has reached the programmed depth (Z word).

The method of programming the tapping cycles will vary, depending on whether absolute pro-gramming (G90) or incremental programming (G91) is used. All sample programs in this chapterare written for absolute programming. Refer to G90/G91 Programming, on page 10-2.

The tool position at the end of each tapping cycle is controlled by the part program throughthe use of the G98 and G99 commands. Refer to G98/G99 Programming, on page 10-3.

TAPPING MODES

CONVENTIONAL TAPPING

Conventional tapping requires the use of a floating tap holder. The feedrate is programmed tomatch the spindle rpm and the Z axis feedrate. Refer to Tapping Feedrate, on page 10-2.

RIGID TAPPING

Rigid tapping is performed through interpolation between the Z axis and the spindle. Whenrigid tapping mode is active, the spindle rotates one revolution as the Z axis is fed a distanceequal to the lead of the tap. This eliminates the need for a floating tap holder, which allows highspeed, high precision tapping.

Rigid tapping mode is activated by the M29 command. The M29 command and a spindlespeed will be programmed in the block preceding the tapping cycle.

Programming Format:

N____ M29 S__ ;N____ G84 X__ Y__ Z__ R__ F__ K__ ;

M-377B 10-1

Page 174: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TAPPING FEEDRATEThe feedrate for the tapping cycle can be specified in inches [millimeters] per minute or

inches [millimeters] per revolution.

G94 Inch [Millimeter] per Minute Feed:

Feedrate = Tap Lead x Spindle Speed

G95 Inch [Millimeter] per Revolution Feed:

Feedrate = Tap Lead

G90/G91 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G90 or G91 can be commanded before a tapping cycle is executed or in the samedata block as the tapping cycle.

G90 commands absolute programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation to theX, Y, and Z axis zero positions. G90 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G91command.

G91 commands incremental programming. All commanded axis motions will be in relation tothe current axis positions. G91 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G90 com-mand.

10-2 M-377B

Page 175: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G98/G99 PROGRAMMING- NOTE -

G98 or G99 can be commanded before a tapping cycle is executed or in the samedata block as the tapping cycle.

G98 commands the tool to retract to the start point of the cycle when the tapping cycle hasbeen completed. G98 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G99 command.

G99 commands the tool to retract to the return point of the cycle when the tapping cycle hasbeen completed. G99 is modal and will remain active until canceled by the G98 command.

Refer to the illustrations shown with each of the tapping cycle descriptions to determine thelocation of the start point and return point of the cycle.

CANCELING TAPPING CYCLESTapping cycles MUST be canceled immediately after completion. If a tapping cycle is not can-

celed and axis motion is commanded, the axes will move to the new coordinate position and ex-ecute the active tapping cycle. Tapping cycles can be canceled as follows:

- Programming a G80 command in a data block by itself immediately after the last datablock to be acted on by the tapping cycle. The G80 command block will be immediatelyafter the data block commanding the tapping cycle EXCEPT when multiple holes willbe tapped. Refer to Tapping Multiple Holes, beginning on page 10-6.

- Programming any other cycle will cancel a tapping cycle.

Pressing the Reset key will cancel rigid tapping mode, but WILL NOT cancel a tapping cycle.

M-377B 10-3

Page 176: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SINGLE PASS TAPPING CYCLESThe G84 and G74 Tapping Cycles function in a similar manner, with the exception of the di-

rection of spindle rotation.

DATA WORDS

Formats

- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.

Inch Programming:

[G84 or G74] X±2.4 Y±2.4 Z±2.4 R±2.4 K1.0 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;

Metric Programming:

[G84 or G74] X±3.3 Y±3.3 Z±3.3 R±3.3 K1.0 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;

DefinitionsG84 COMMAND G code for Right-Hand Tapping Cycle.

G74 COMMAND G code for Left-Hand Tapping Cycle.

X WORD Specifies the X axis coordinate for the tapped hole, in reference to X0(zero). In the sample program segment, the X axis coordinate for thetapped hole is “X5.0".

Y WORD Specifies the Y axis coordinate for the tapped hole, in reference to Y0(zero). In the sample program segment, the Y axis coordinate for thetapped hole is “Y3.0".

Z WORD Specifies the final depth of the tapped hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthe sample program segment, the final depth of the tapped hole is 3.0inches.

R WORD Specifies the absolute distance from Z0 to the return point of the cycle.Refer to “R”, in Figure 10.1 . In the sample program segment, the dis-tance is .1 inches.

K WORD Specifies the number of times the tapping cycle will be performed ateach location. K is assumed to be “1" if it is not programmed. When”K0." is programmed, the tapping cycle data will be stored by the ma-chine control, but the tapping cycle will not be executed.

F WORD Specifies the feedrate for the tapping cycle. In the sample program seg-ment, the feedrate is 17.61 inches per minute.

10-4 M-377B

Page 177: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool Dia. : ½ inch (13 TPI)Tool Offset #: 11

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece and a ½" tap will be pro-grammed to a depth of 3.0 inches. Refer to Figure 10.1 .

G90 (absolute positioning), G94 (inch/minute feed), and G98 (return to start point) are thepower-up defaults and are active for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

N220 M06 T11 ; Change Tool Sequence

N230 G00 G90 X5. Y3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N240 G43 H11 Z1. S229 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #11Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 229 RPM, Coolant ON

N250 G84 G98 Z-3.0 R.1 F17.61 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define G84 Cycle and Tap Hole

N260 G80 ; Cancel G84 Cycle

N270 M06 T12 ; Change Tool Sequence

.

M-377B 10-5

Figure 10.1 - Single Pass Tapping Cycle

R.100Return Point

Z1.000Start Point

.900

Z-3.000Z Word

+Z

Z0

TI3022

Page 178: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TAPPING MULTIPLE HOLESThe tapping cycles described in this chapter can be used to tap multiple holes. As mentioned

in “Canceling Tapping Cycles”, page 10-3, a tapping cycle will remain active until canceled by aG80 command or another cycle. Once a tapping cycle is commanded, it is only necessary toprogram X and Y axis positions in subsequent data blocks to command the machine tool to exe-cute the tapping cycle at each position. The G80 command is programmed after all holes for thecurrent tool have been completed.

- CAUTION -Exercise care when selecting the start point for the cycle and the return code(G98/G99). If the workpiece has ribs or other protrusions that extend above Z0and an incorrect retract point is selected, the tool could strike the workpiece.

SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT

SPECIFICATIONS

Z0 : Part SurfaceMaterial : Cast Iron (220 BHN)Tool Type: High Speed SteelTool 11 Dia.: ½ inch (13 threads per inch)Tool 11 Offset #: 11Tool 12 Dia.: 3/4 inch (10 threads per inch)Tool 12 Offset #: 12

In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the surface of the workpiece. Nine holes will be tapped½"-13 to a depth of 3.00 inches. Six holes will be tapped 3/4"-10 through the workpiece. Referto Figure 10.2, on page 10-8.

G90 (absolute positioning), G94 (inch/minute feed), and G98 (return to start point) are thepower-up defaults and are active for this example.

Sample Program Segment:

.

.

N210 M6 T11 ; Tool Change Sequence

N220 G00 G90 X.5 Y-3. ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N230 G43 H11 Z1. S229 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #11,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 229 RPM, Coolant ON

N240 M29 S229 ; Activate Rigid Tapping Mode

N250 G84 G98 Z-3.0 R.1 F17.61 ; Establish G98 Mode,Define G84 Cycle and Tap Hole #1

N260 Y-6. ; Tap Hole #2

N270 Y-9. ; Tap Hole #3

10-6 M-377B

Page 179: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

N280 X6.125 ; Tap Hole #4

N290 Y-6. ; Tap Hole #5

N300 Y-3. ; Tap Hole #6

N310 X10.75 Tap Hole #7

N320 Y-6. ; Tap Hole #8

N330 Y-9. ; Tap Hole #9

N340 G80; Cancel Cycle

N350 M6 T12 ; Tool Change Sequence

N360 G00 G90 X4. Y-1.5 ; Activate Absolute Positioning, Rapid to XY Position

N370 G43 H12 Z1. S153 M13 ; Activate Tool Length Offset #12,Rapid to Z Axis Start Point,Spindle Forward 153 RPM, Coolant ON

N380 G84 G99 Z-2.625 R.1 F15.3 ; Establish G99 ModeDefine G84 Cycle and Tap Hole #10

N390 Y-6. ; Tap Hole #11

N400 Y-10.5 ; Tap Hole #12

N410 X8.25 ; Tap Hole #13

N420 Y-6. ; Tap Hole #14

N430 Y-1.5 ; Tap Hole #15

N440 G80 ; Cancel Cycle

N450 M6 T13 ; Tool Change Sequence

.

.

PROGRAM NOTES

1. “M6 T_” Tool Change Sequence (Blocks N210, N350, and N450)

The T word defines the tool to be used for the current operation.

2. G98 Move to Start Point (Block N250)

The G98 command was programmed to move the tool to the start point (Z1.0) aftereach ½"-13 tapped hole. If G99 (Tool to Return Point) had been used, the tool wouldhave impacted the ribs on the workpiece when moving to holes 4 and 7.

3. G99 Move to Return Point (Block N380)

The G99 command was programmed to move the tool to the return point (Z.1) aftereach 3/4"-10 tapped hole. This was possible due to the fact that no interference existsbetween these holes.

M-377B 10-7

Page 180: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

10-8 M-377B

Figure 10.2 - Sample Workpiece: Tapping Multiple Holeswith Tapping Cycles

10.500

.500

4.000

6.125

8.250

10.750

X0. Y0.

9.000

6.000

3.000

1.500

½” Diameter(9 Places)

3/4” Diameter(6 Places)

Note: All dimensions are shown in inches.

#10

#1

#2

#3

#11

#12

#6

#5

#4

#7

#8

#9

#15

#14

#13

TI3024A

3.0002.625

Z1.0 Start Point

Z0.1 Return PointZ ZERO

.750

Page 181: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 10-9

Page 182: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

10-10 M-377B

Page 183: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 11 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENTGENERAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION

The basic concept of Tool Life Management is that after a specific number of parts or a spe-cific amount of machining time, the control will automatically begin using another tool in place ofthe current tool being used for a particular operation.

Tools are assigned to specific groups, as designated by the programmer. The control willmonitor the measurement value assigned to each tool group and automatically switch to the nexttool in the group when the counter for that tool group reaches the measurement value specifiedby the programmer.

TOOL LIFE MEASUREMENT UNITS

Tool life can be measured using one of the two following methods:

1. Number of parts (machined by the tool)

2. Amount of machining time (on the tool)

Only one of these measurement units can be used at a time. “Number of parts” will be the pa-rameter setting when the machine is shipped from the factory. Refer to the operator’s manual(M-400) for information on verifying or switching the active measurement unit through the param-eter setting.

An alarm message will be displayed when any tool group has reached its programmed toollife and an “M30" (End of Program) is read by the control. At that point, the machine operatorwill replace the tooling and reset the counter relating to the affected tool group. Refer to the op-erator’s manual (M-400) for information on resetting a tool group counter.

Number of PartsWhen this type of measurement is used, the control will increment the tool group counter for

the active tool each time the tool group is called by the part program.

Amount of Machining TimeWhen this type of measurement is used, the control will run the tool group counter for the cur-

rent tool whenever G01, G02, or G03 is active.

M-377B 11-1

Page 184: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

GENERAL PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONWhen using Tool Life Management, tools and offsets are assigned to specific groups. These

groups are established by the programmer through the use of a Tool Life Management program,which is independent of the part program. The Tool Life Management program will define theparameters required for Tool Life Management.

The Tool Life Management program defines the following parameters:

1. Group numbers.

2. Tool life value for each group.

3. Tool numbers and offsets for each group.

- CAUTION -When the Tool Life Management program is executed, all Tool Life Manage-ment counters will be reset to 0 (zero).

When using Tool Life Management, the machine operator MUST load and execute the ToolLife Management program BEFORE executing the part program for the first time.

Refer to Tool Life Management Program, beginning on page 11-3, for specific information onthe Tool Life Management program.

Refer to Part Program, beginning on page 11-7, for information on how to incorporate ToolLife Management information in the part program.

11-2 M-377B

Page 185: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM

PROGRAM FORMAT

- NOTE -For information on each of the data words used in the Tool Life Management pro-gram, refer to Data Word Definitions, on page 11-4.

Inputting New DataO _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ G10 L3 ;

Define Tool Group 1 N _ _ P1 L _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;

Define Tool Group 2 N _ _ P2 L _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;

Define Tool Group 3 N _ _ P3 L _ _ ;.N _ _ G11 ;N _ _ M30 ;

Updating Existing DataExisting tool life management data can be edited by programming “P1" on the G10 line.

If the group specified by the P word on the L word line already exists, the old data will be up-dated. If the group specified by the P word on the L word line does not already exist, a new toolgroup will be defined.

If “P1" is omitted from the G10 line while inputting data, the control will assume that new toollife data is being input. All tool life groups not specified in the Tool Life Management programwill be cleared.

O _ _ _ _ ;P1=Add/Change Function N _ _ G10 L3 P1 ;Update Tool Group 1 N _ _ P1 L _ _ ;

N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ H _ _ D _ _ ;.N _ _ G11 ;N _ _ M30 ;

(Continued on next page)

M-377B 11-3

Page 186: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Deleting Existing DataSelected tool life management data can be deleted from the control by programming “P2" on

the G10 line. All tool groups specified by a P word AFTER the G10 line will be cleared.

O _ _ _ _ ;P2=Delete Function N _ _ G10 L3 P2 ;

N _ _ P_ _ ;N _ _ P_ _ ;N _ _ P_ _ ;.N _ _ G11 ;N _ _ M30 ;

Data Word DefinitionsO _ _ _ _ = Program Number

N _ _ = Block Number

G10 = Begin Tool Data Input

L3 = Memory Location for Tool Life Management Data (DO NOT ALTER)

P _ _ = Tool Group Number

L _ _ _ _ = Tool Life Value Data Word

T _ _ = Tool Number

H _ _ = Tool Length Offset Number

D _ _ = Tool Diameter Offset Number

G11 = End Tool Data Input

M30 = End of Program

P WORD - TOOL GROUP NUMBERThe P word is used to specify the group number to be assigned to each group of tooling.

The numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal point programmingis not allowed.

Examples: P1 (Tool Group 1)P12 (Tool Group 12)

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on verifying or setting the maxi-mum number of tool groups allowed.

11-4 M-377B

Page 187: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

L WORD - TOOL LIFE VALUE DATA WORDThe L word is used to specify tool life for each tool group in the Tool Life Management

program. The numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal pointprogramming is not allowed.

Examples: L25 (Tool life equals 25)L200 (Tool life equals 200)

The following chart shows the minimum and maximum values that may be used with theL word when programming Tool Life Management.

Measurement Unit Minimum Value Maximum Value

Number of Parts 1 9999

Machining Time (minutes) 1 4300

Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on verifying or setting the mea-surement unit to be used.

T WORD - TOOL NUMBERThe standard T word format is used when defining tool numbers in the Tool Life Manage-

ment program.

Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Offsets” for information on defining tool numbers.

H WORD - TOOL LENGTH OFFSETThe standard H word format is used when defining tool length offsets in the Tool Life

Management program.

Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Offsets” for information on defining tool lengthoffsets.

D WORD - TOOL DIAMETER OFFSETThe standard D word format is used when defining tool diameter offsets in the Tool Life

Management program.

Refer to “Chapter 5 - Tool Selection and Offsets” for information on defining tool diameteroffsets.

PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P or L data words.

2. The same tool number and/or tool offset may be assigned to more than one tool group.

3. Tool numbers may NOT be assigned to the same tool group more than once, regardlessof the tool offset to be used.

M-377B 11-5

Page 188: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM (Inputting New Data)

In this sample program we will assume that the measurement unit is set to “Number of Parts”.Refer to the operator’s manual (M-400) for information on verifying or switching the active mea-surement unit.

O7500 ;N1 (Operator Message) ;N10 G10 L3 ;

Define Tool Group 1 N20 P1 L10 ;N30 T1 H1 D2 ;N40 T2 H3 D4 ;N50 T3 H5 D6 ;

Define Tool Group 2 N60 P2 L20 ;N70 T11 H21 D22 ;N80 T12 H23 D24 ;

Define Tool Group 3 N90 P3 L30 ;N100 T9 H31 D32 ;N110 G11 ;N120 M30 ;

Data Block DefinitionsBlock N1 contains an operator message.

Block N10 contains the “Begin Tool Data Input” command (G10) and the memory loca-tion (L3) where the data will be stored.

Block N20 contains the number of the first tool group (Group 1) and the measurementvalue for each group 1 tool (value = 10).

Blocks N30 through N50 contain the tool numbers and tool offset data for the tools as-signed to group 1.

Block N60 contains the number of the second tool group (Group 2) and measurementvalue for each group 2 tool (value = 20).

Blocks N70 and N80 contain the tool numbers and tool offset data for the tools assignedto group 2.

Block N90 contains the number of the third tool group (Group 3) and the measurementvalue for each group 3 tool (value = 30).

Block N100 contains the tool number and tool offset data for the tool assigned to group3.

Block N110 contains the “End Tool Data Input” command (G11).

Block N120 contains the “End of Program” command (M30).

11-6 M-377B

Page 189: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PART PROGRAM

TOOL COMMANDS

Tool numbers and offsets were assigned to tool groups in the Tool Life Management pro-gram. Refer to Tool Life Management Program, beginning on page 11-3. The tool groups arecalled from the part program using the T word. The data word format for the T word is T4. Deci-mal point programming is not allowed.

T Word Format:

T1_ _ T Word Format (for Tool Life Management)

Activating a Tool Group:

T101 Activate Tool Group 1T112 Activate Tool Group 12

Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management

O1278 ; Program Number

G20 or G21 ; Establish English or Metric mode

N _ _ (___________) ; Operator Message

N _ _ M06 T101 ; Activate Tool Group 1, Tool Change Sequence

N _ _ G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning

N _ _ G43 H99 Z_ S1000 M13 ; Move to Activate Tool Length Compensation for Tool Group 1,Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ON

N _ _ G01 G41 X _ Y _ D99 F_ ; Linear Interpolation, Move to Activate Tool DiameterCompensation for Tool Group 1, Feedrate

- MACHINE PART -

N _ _ M01 ; Option Stop

N _ _ (___________) ; Operator Message

N _ _ M06 T102 ; Activate Tool Group 2, Tool Change Sequence

N _ _ G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning

N _ _ G43 H99 Z_ S1000 M13 ; Move to Activate Tool Length Compensation for Tool Group 2,Spindle Forward1000 RPM, Coolant ON

N _ _ G01 G42 X _ Y _ D99 F_ ; Linear Interpolation, Move to Activate Tool Diameter Compensationfor Tool Group 2, Feedrate

- MACHINE PART -

N _ _ M01 ; Option Stop

.

.

N _ _ M30 ; End of Program

M-377B 11-7

Page 190: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

COMBINING TOOL COMMANDS

Some tools may be expected to last the full life of a particular job. In this case it would be de-sirable to program the individual tool in the part program, rather than go to the trouble of assign-ing the tool to a tool group and defining the tool group life high enough to run for the full life ofthe job.

It is possible to combine standard tool commands and Tool Life Management commands inthe same part program. Standard tool commands may be programmed in operations that pre-cede or follow operations using Tool Life Management commands. The only restriction is thatthe active tool or tool group must be canceled before another tool or tool group can be called.

Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool CommandsO1278 ; Program Number

G20 or G21 ; Establish English or Metric mode

N _ _ (___________) ; Operator Message

N _ _ M06 T1 ; Tool Change Sequence, Load Tool 1

N _ _ G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning

N _ _ G43 H1 Z _ S1000 M13 : Move to Activate Tool Length Compensation for Tool 1,Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ON

N _ _ G01 G41 X _ Y _ D2 F_ ; Linear Interpolation, Move to Activate Tool Diameter Compensationfor Tool 1, Feedrate

- MACHINE PART -

N _ _ M01 ; Option Stop

N _ _ (___________) ; Operator Message

N _ _ M06 T101 ; Activate Tool Group 1, Tool Change Sequence

N _ _ G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; Positioning Mode, Absolute Positioning

N _ _ G43 H99 Z_ S1000 M13 ; Move to Activate Tool Length Compensation for Tool Group 1,Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ON

N _ _ G01 G41 X _ Y _ D99 F_ ; Linear Interpolation, Move to Activate Tool Diameter Compensationfor Tool Group 1, Feedrate

- MACHINE PART -

N _ _ M01 ; Option Stop

.

.

N _ _ M30 ; End of Program

11-8 M-377B

Page 191: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B 11-9

Page 192: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

11-10 M-377B

Page 193: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

CHAPTER 12 - OPTIONS ANDMISCELLANEOUS FEATURES

INCH / METRIC MODESetting Page 1 is used to establish whether the control is to power up and operate in Inch

mode or Metric mode. This section outlines the procedure for selecting the desired operatingmode.

Through the use of the G20 (Inch Mode) and G21 (Metric Mode) commands, it is possible tooperate in either mode regardless of which mode has been selected on Setting Page 1. How-ever, the use of these G codes will not automatically adjust the position registers to display theposition values in the proper units (inches vs millimeters).

- CAUTION -Part programs should usually be written in the same format as selected onSetting Page 1. Programs not written in the same format as established onSetting Page 1 MUST contain the appropriate Inch/Metric G code, G20/G21 re-spectively. When required, this G code must be programmed by itself in thefirst data block.

When the operating mode is changed, the coordinate system values and thetool offsets are NOT automatically changed to the appropriate units. Theymust be changed manually.

- NOTE -After the “Inch” field on Setting Page 1 has been modified, a Zero Return (Refer-ence Home) operation must be performed. If necessary, refer to Chapter 2 of theoperator’s manual (M-400) for the Zero Return procedure.

ESTABLISHING INCH / METRIC MODE

1. Select Manual Data Input mode.

2. Press the Diagnostic Parameter key.

3. Press the Parameter soft key.

4. If necessary, use the Page keys to display Setting Page 1.

5. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the “Inch” field.

6. Key in the appropriate number (0:MM 1:INCH).

7. Press the Input key.

8. Perform a Zero Return operation. The machine will be set to the desired operatingmode.

M-377B 12-1

Page 194: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SUBPROGRAMSThe subprogram feature provides the main part program with the capability of calling fre-

quently repeated patterns from memory, and executing them a specified number of times. Thesubprogram is called from a special block in the main part program. The subprogram must be inmemory, when called.

Subprogram Format:

O____; Subprogram NameN____; Program BlockN____; .N____; .N____; .M99; Return to calling program

Subprograms stored in memory must be identified by the letter “O” followed by program num-ber in the first data block. Refer to Program Number, page 1-8.

The last data block of the subprogram MUST contain an M99 command. This commandshould be in a block by itself.

Subprograms may be stored from the Manual Data Input keyboard, from a separate tape orfloppy disk, or from the tape or floppy disk containing the main part program.

12-2 M-377B

Page 195: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SUBPROGRAM CALL

Subprograms are activated by a special “call” block in the main part program which musthave the following format:

M98 Paaabbbb ;

Where:

M98 is the miscellaneous command to activate the subprogram call function.

P is the letter address used to specify the number of times the subprogram is to be per-formed and the subprogram number.

“aaa” specifies the number of times the subprogram is to be performed. The subprogrammay be performed up to 999 times. If no value is entered, the subprogram is performedonce.

“bbbb” specifies number of the subprogram to be executed.

Sample Program Line #1:M98 P50100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed five times.)

Sample Program Line #2:M98 P100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed one time.)

Sample Program Line #3:M98 P9990100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed 999 times.)

- NOTE -When the subprogram is to be executed just once, use the format shown in sampleprogram line #2. As shown, leading zeros may be omitted from the subprogramnumber when this format is used.

M-377B 12-3

Page 196: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G96 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

INTRODUCTION

Constant Surface Speed programming provides the capability of programming the speed ofthe tool with respect to the workpiece directly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) orsurface meters per minute in metric mode (G21).

Constant Surface Speed programming is a function of the spindle speed range and the pro-grammed constant surface speed (S word). Constant Surface Speed mode is selected by theG96 command and is canceled by G97. The G97 command is the start-up mode and selects thedirect RPM mode, which allows direct RPM programming of the spindle speed.

In Constant Surface Speed mode, the constant surface speed command to the spindle is alsoprogrammed as an S word. The format is S4 in inch mode (G20) and S3 in metric mode (G21).The units are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in met-ric mode (G21).

A feedrate must also be programmed. The control will then automatically adjust the spindlespeed within its range to maintain a constant surface speed regardless of the position of thetool. Since the feedrate is held constant while the spindle speed varies, it is recommended thatthe feedrate be programmed in inches [millimeters] per revolution (G95). This will prevent over-loading the tool in case a fast feedrate is active when the spindle speed is decreasing.

A spindle speed MUST be active when entering Constant Surface Speed mode or a CycleStop condition will be created when the first block following the Constant Surface Speed com-mand is encountered.

The Spindle Override, Feedrate Override, and Rapid Override switches are active in ConstantSurface Speed mode.

12-4 M-377B

Page 197: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAMMING FORMAT

G92 S____ ;

G96 P__ S____ ;

Data Word DefinitionsG92 G code for maximum RPM during Constant Surface Speed

G96 G code for Constant Surface Speed

P__ Axis Select:

P0 = Axis specified by parameter 41, bits 4 & 5

P1 = X axis

P2 = Y axis

P3 = Z axis

P4 = 4th axis

S____ Maximum RPM (G92) or Surface Speed (G96)

- NOTE -If the P word is omitted from the G96 command line, P0 is assumed by the control.

M-377B 12-5

Page 198: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SCALING MODEScaling mode allows the programmer modify the scale factor applied to the X, Y, and Z axes.

A scale factor of “1" is the default scale factor. A scale factor greater than ”1" will result in mag-nification of the coordinate system. A scale factor less than “1" will result in reduction of the co-ordinate system.

Scaling mode is canceled by the G50 command.

Scaling mode is activated by the G51 command.

TYPES OF SCALING

A single scaling factor can be applied to all three axes (X, Y, and Z) or independent scalingfactors can be applied to each axis. The use of a single scale factor for multiple axes is referredto as Uniform Scaling. The use of a separate scale factor for each axis is referred to as Inde-pendent Scaling.

Independent scaling also allows the programmer to mirror the tool path on one or more axes.Refer to Mirror Imaging, page 12-9 .

Uniform ScalingRefer to Figure 12.1 for examples of uniform scaling. Positions A1 through D1 represent the

coordinate locations before scaling is activated (scale factor = 1). Positions A2 through D2 repre-sent the coordinate locations after scaling is activated (scale factor = 2). Notice the different co-ordinate locations, based on a different location of the scaling center point, designated “CP”.

(Continued on next page)

12-6 M-377B

Figure 12.1 - Uniform Scaling

B1

+Y

+X

B2

C1

A1 D1

C2

A2 D2

CP

B1

+Y

+X

B2

C1

A1 D1

C2

A2D2

CP

TI3127

Page 199: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Programming Format: G51 X___ Y___ Z___ P___ ;

Data Word Descriptions: G51 : Activate Scaling Mode

X : X axis coordinate for scaling center point

Y : Y axis coordinate for scaling center point

Z : Z axis coordinate for scaling center point

P : Scale factor for all axes

When an X, Y, or Z axis coordinate is omitted from the command line, the current position forthe omitted axis will be used.

When the P word is omitted from the command line, the value in parameter 731 will be used.

M-377B 12-7

Page 200: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Independent ScalingRefer to Figure 12.2 for an example of independent scaling. Independent scaling also allows

for mirror imaging through the use of negative scale factors.

Programming Format: G51 X___ Y___ Z___ I___ J___ K___ ;

Data Word Descriptions: G51 : Activate Scaling ModeX : X axis coordinate for scaling center pointY : Y axis coordinate for scaling center pointZ : Z axis coordinate for scaling center pointI : Scale factor for X axisJ : Scale factor for Y axisK : Scale factor for Z axis

When an X, Y, or Z axis coordinate is omitted from the command line, the current position forthe omitted axis will be used.

When the I word is omitted from the command line, the value in parameter 731 will be used.

When the J word is omitted from the command line, the value in parameter 732 will be used.

When the K word is omitted from the command line, the value in parameter 733 will be used.

Examples

SCALE FACTORS FOR MAGNIFICATIONThis example assumes that programmed coor-

dinates A1 through D1 are at a scale factor of “1"

X Scale Factor = b � a

Y Scale Factor = d � c

SCALE FACTORS FOR REDUCTIONThis example assumes that programmed coor-

dinates A2 through D2 are at a scale factor of “1"

X Scale Factor = a � b

Y Scale Factor = c � d

12-8 M-377B

Figure 12.2 - Independent Scaling

ScalingCenterPoint

D2

+X

TI3128+Y

C2

A2

B2

D1A1

B1 C1

b

a

c

d

Page 201: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

MIRROR IMAGING

Mirror Imaging combines independent scaling with the capability of mirroring the programmedcoordinates around one or more selected axes. Refer to Independent Scaling, page 12-8, for in-formation on defining scale factors for each axis.

Example

This example illustrates the mirroring feature without scaling the programmed tool path.Programming positive values other than “1" would result in scaling only. Programming neg-ative values other than ”-1" would result in mirroring and scaling.

The sample tool path shown in Figure 12.3 traces the patterns as they are labeled (1through 4). In this example, a subprogram is used to define original tool path, which is la-beled “1".

SUBPROGRAM:

O0101 ; Program Number

G90 X6. Y6. ; Absolute Positioning, XY Coordinate

Y7. ; Y Coordinate

X7. ; X Coordinate

X8. Y8. ; XY Coordinate

X9. ; X Coordinate

Y6. ; Y Coordinate

X6. ; X Coordinate

M99 ; Return to Main Program

MAIN PROGRAM SEGMENT

.

G90 G1 F__ ;

M98 P101 ; Execute Subprogram O0101 (Tool Path #1)

G51 Y5. J-1 ; Establish Center Point, Select Y Axis Mirror

M98 P101 ; Execute Subprogram O0101 (Tool Path #2)

G51 X5. I-1 ; Establish Center Point, Select X Axis Mirror

M98 P101 ; Execute Subprogram O0101 (Tool Path #3)

G50 X0 Y0 ; Cancel Mirror on X and Y Axes

G51 X5. I-1 ; Establish Center Point, Select X Axis Mirror

M98 P101 ; Execute Subprogram O0101 (Tool Path #4)

G50 X0 Y0 ; Cancel Mirror on X and Y Axes

.

M-377B 12-9

Revised: June 4, 2004

Page 202: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

12-10 M-377B

Figure 12.3 - Mirror Image Example

10.0

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

+Y

+X

1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

4

3

1

2

TI3129

Page 203: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SCALING MODE NOTES

1. G51 should be programmed in a block that defines the scaling (or mirroring) center pointand scale factors.

2. Zero cannot be specified for the scaling factor.

3. Decimal point programming is not allowed when using I, J, or K to specify scale factor.

4. The position display shows the coordinate value after scaling.

5. DO NOT program G27, G28, G29, G30, or G92 while scaling is active (G51 mode).Cancel scaling mode with a G50 command.

6. Scaling mode does not effect the following tooling data:

- Tool diameter compensation values- Tool length compensation values- Tool offset values

7. Scaling mode does not effect the following functions during machining cycles:

- Depth of cut per pass (Q word) and retract amount during G73 or G83 Peck Drilling cy-cles.

- Incremental tool shift value (Q word) during G76 Fine Boring cycle.

- Incremental tool shift value (Q word) during G87 Back Boring cycle.

8. Be sure to cancel scaling (mirroring) with a G50 command when it is no longer required.

M-377B 12-11

Page 204: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

MACRO PROGRAMSMacro programs can be executed as modal or non-modal programs.

NON-MODAL MACRO CALL

Program a G65 command in the macro call data block if a macro program is to be executedas a non-modal macro program. The macro call data block will be executed one time.

MODAL MACRO CALL

Program a G66 command in the macro call data block if a macro program is to be executedas a modal macro program. When macro call mode is active, the macro call data block will beexecuted each time an axis move is commanded.

Macro call mode is canceled by a G67 command.

MACRO CALL FORMAT

G65 (G66) Pxxxx Lyy a b c ... ;

Definitions: G65 Non-modal macro call

G66 Modal macro call

P Macro program format letter

xxxx Macro program number

L Repetition format letter

yy Number of repetitions

a, b, c ... Macro variable(s), if required

; End of block character

- NOTE -“L1" is assumed if an L word is not programmed.

Refer to the Fanuc documentation supplied with the machine tool for more information onmacro programs.

12-12 M-377B

Page 205: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60)

INTRODUCTION

Single direction positioning (G60 command) allows the programmer to command the machinetool to approach all programmed positions from a specific direction (+ or -) on each axis. Usingsingle direction positioning effectively eliminates positioning errors that might otherwise resultfrom backlash in servo drive systems.

DETERMINING DIRECTION AND DISTANCE

Machines Equipped with Hardinge / Fanuc System II Control

DIRECTIONPositioning direction is the direction in which the axes move to make the final approach to the

programmed coordinate. When programming Single Direction positioning (G60), the axis or axesin motion will always move from the stop position to the programmed endpoint (final position) inthe direction specified by parameter 29.

The direction for the final move to approach the workpiece is established by parameter 29,bits 0 through 3. Each bit establishes the approach direction for a specific axis. The bits in pa-rameter 29 are numbered as follows:

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit Assignments

Parameter 29, bit 0 establishes the approach direction for the X axis

Parameter 29, bit 0 establishes the approach direction for the Y axis

Parameter 29, bit 0 establishes the approach direction for the Z axis

Parameter 29, bit 0 establishes the approach direction for the 4th axis

Bit Values

0 = Approach with positive axis motion

1 = Approach with negative axis motion

M-377B 12-13Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 206: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

DISTANCE

- NOTE -The axis or axes in motion will stop at the approach distance regardless of the di-rection of approach.

The distance for the final move to approach the workpiece is established by the value in pa-rameters 204 through 207.

Single direction positioning is disabled when the distance parameter is set to “0".

The valid range of values for parameters 204 through 207 is:

0 to 255

Parameter Assignments

Parameter 204 establishes the approach distance for the X axis

Parameter 205 establishes the approach distance for the Y axis

Parameter 206 establishes the approach distance for the Z axis

Parameter 207 establishes the approach distance for the 4th axis

The values entered in these parameters are interpreted according to the following format:

Inch Mode: .001 inches

Metric Mode .01 millimeters

Rotation Mode: .01 degrees

12-14 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 207: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Machines Equipped with Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc 18-MC ControlThe direction and distance for the final approach to the programmed coordinate is specified

by parameter 5440.

The valid range of values for parameter 5440 is:

-16383 to +16383

Single direction positioning is disabled when parameter 5440 is set to “0".

DIRECTIONPositioning direction is the direction in which the axes move to make the final approach to the

programmed coordinate. When programming Single Direction positioning (G60), the axis or axesin motion will always move from the stop position to the programmed endpoint (final position) inthe direction specified by parameter 5440.

The direction for the final move to approach the workpiece is established by the sign of thevalue in parameter 5440.

DISTANCE

- NOTE -The axis or axes in motion will stop at the approach distance regardless of the di-rection of approach.

The distance for the final move to approach the workpiece is established by the value in pa-rameter 5440.

The value entered in this parameter establishes the final approach distance and is interpretedaccording to the following formats:

Inch Mode: .001 inches

Metric Mode: .01 millimeters

Rotation Axis: .01 degrees

M-377B 12-15Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 208: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ExamplesInch mode:

The value “30" establishes a final approach in the positive direction at a distance at.0300 inches.

Metric Mode:

The value “-65" establishes a final approach in the negative direction at a distance of.650 millimeters.

Sample PositioningThe examples in Figure 12.4 assume that the approach distance is set to a positive (+) value.

View 1 shows a positive (+) move from the start position toward the final position. Axis motionstops at the approach distance; then, proceeds to the end position. The final approach move willbe in the positive (+) direction.

View 2 shows a negative (-) move from the start position toward the final position. Axis motionoverruns the end position to reach the stop position; then, proceeds to the end position. The fi-nal approach move will be in the positive (+) direction.

12-16 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Figure 12.4 - Sample Positioning Moves

StartPosition

ApproachDistance

StopPosition

EndPosition

ApproachDistance

StartPosition

StopPosition

EndPosition

VIEW 1

+Y

+X

TI3172

VIEW 2

Page 209: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Single direction positioning is not performed for Z axis moves during auto drilling cycles.

2. Single direction positioning is not performed when an invalid approach distance is speci-fied in parameter 5440.

3. Single direction positioning is not performed when parameter 5440 is set to zero.

4. The direction of the approach move is NOT affected by mirror image programming.

5. Single direction positioning does not apply to the shift value used with the G76 and G87boring cycles.

M-377B 12-17Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 210: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

PROGRAMMING THE 4TH AXIS [Option]

INTRODUCTION

Motion on the 4th axis is programmed with the B data word. The B word must be pro-grammed in degrees.

FORMULAS

Workpiece Circumference = Part Diameter x � (3.1416)

= 4.000 x 3.1416 = 12.5664

Degrees of Motion = [Inches x 360] � Circumference

DESCRIPTION OF SAMPLE OPERATION

Mill a .875 x 1.5 pocket, .125 deep, on the diameter of the workpiece. Refer to Figure 12.5 .

SAMPLE PART CALCULATIONS

Length of Pocket = 1.000 inches

Degrees of Motion = [1.000 x 360] � 12.5664 = 28.647°

12-18 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Figure 12.5 - Sample Workpiecefor 4th Axis Programming

Side View ofRound Workpiece

.750

.375

4.000

.500

.875

2.000

1.000 1.500 28.647°

NOTE: All dimensions shown in inches.

TOOL: .500 Diameter End Mill

NOTE:Program the tool from the centerline of the cutter.

TI4145

Page 211: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

SAMPLE PROGRAM

%

O2345

G54

M6 T1

G0 G90 X.750 Y0. B0.

G43 H1 Z.1 S2000 M3

G1 Z-.125 F5.

B28.647 F80.

X1.125 F30.

B0. F80.

X.75 F30.

G0 Z.1

G91 G30 Z0. Y0. M19

M30

%

M-377B 12-19Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 212: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

12-20 M-377B

Page 213: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

APPENDIX

M-377B A-1

Figure A.1 - X and Y Axis TravelSpecifications with Work Envelope

(VMC600II Machining Center)

.08[2]

2.85[72.5]

.08[2]

.98[25]

X0. Y0.Home Position

Software Limits

TI4067

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].Software limits indicated by dashed line.

20.08[510.0]

20.16[512]

29.53[750]

23.62[600]

Page 214: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

A-2 M-377B

Figure A.2 - X and Y Axis TravelSpecifications with Work Envelope

(VMC800II Machining Center)

.08[2]

X0. Y0.Home Position

.08[2]

2.38[60.5]

.20[5]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].Software limits indicated by dashed line.

TI4068

Software Limits

36.40[925]

31.50[800]

20.08[510]

20.16[512]

Page 215: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B A-3

Figure A.3 - X and Y Axis TravelSpecifications with Work Envelope

(VMC1000II Machining Center)

.08[2]

X0. Y0.Home Position

44.09[1120]

40.16[1020]

.08[2]

1.89[48.0]

20.08[510]

20.16[512]

.20[5]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].Software limits indicated by dashed line.

TI4068

Software Limits

Page 216: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

A-4 M-377B

Figure A.4 - X and Y Axis TravelSpecifications with Work Envelope

(VMC1250II Machining Center)

.08[2]

X0. Y0.Home Position

53.94[1370]

49.21[1250]

.08[2]

1.89[48.0]

25.98[660]

26.06[662]

.20[5]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].Software limits indicated by dashed line.

TI4068

Software Limits

Page 217: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B A-5

Figure A.5 - X and Y Axis TravelSpecifications with Work Envelope

(VMC1500II Machining Center)

.08[2]

X0. Y0.Home Position

63.94[1624]

60.00[1524]

.08[2]

1.89[48.0]

25.98[660]

26.06[662]

.20[5]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].Software limits indicated by dashed line.

TI4068

Software Limits

Page 218: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

A-6 M-377B

Figure A.6 - Z Axis Travel Specifications(VMC600II, VMC800II, and VMC1000II Machining Centers)

Z AxisHome Position

NOTE: All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

TI4069A

-Z Software Limit

+Z Software Limit

MachineTable

MachineSpindle

6.10 [155.0]

20.08 [510.0]

.08 [2.0]

Page 219: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B A-7

Figure A.7 - Z Axis Travel Specifications(VMC1250II and VMC1500II Machining Centers)

Z AxisHome Position

NOTE: All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

TI4069A

-Z Software Limit

+Z Software Limit

MachineTable

MachineSpindle

6.10 [155.0]

25.00 [635.0]

.08 [2.0]

Page 220: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

A-8 M-377B

Figure A.8 - Tool Slot Locations and Configuration(VMC600II Machining Center)

TI4070

20.08[510]

6.30[160]

6.30[160]

29.53[750]

.71[18]

1.18[30]

.75[19]

.47[12]

10.04[255]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

Page 221: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B A-9

Figure A.9 - Tool Slot Locations and Configuration(VMC800II Machining Center)

TI4071

6.30[160]

6.30[160]

10.04[255]

20.08[510]

36.42[925]

1.18[30]

.75[19]

.47[12]

.71[18]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

Page 222: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

A-10 M-377B

Figure A.10 - Tool Slot Locations and Configuration(VMC1000II Machining Center)

TI4071

6.30[160]

6.30[160]

10.04[255]

20.08[510]

44.09[1120]

1.18[30]

.75[19]

.47[12]

.71[18]

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

Page 223: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M-377B A-11

Figure A.11 - Tool Slot Locations and Configuration(VMC1250II Machining Center)

TI4923

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

25.98[660]

1.18[30]

.75[19]

.47[12]

.71[18]

53.94[1370]

3.15[80]

4.92[125]

Page 224: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

A-12 M-377B

Figure A.12 - Tool Slot Locations and Configuration(VMC1500II Machining Center)

TI4923

NOTE:All dimensions shown in inches [millimeters].

25.98[660]

1.18[30]

.75[19]

.47[12]

.71[18]

63.94[1624]

3.15[80]

4.92[125]

Page 225: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G CODE LIST(Preparatory Codes)

G Word Group Definition

G00 1 Rapid Traverse Positioning Mode

G01 1 Linear Interpolation

G02 1 Clockwise Circular / Helical Interpolation

G03 1 Counterclockwise Circular / Helical Interpolation

G04 0 Dwell

G09 0 Exact Stop, Non-Modal

G10 0 Data Setting Mode ON

G11 0 Data Setting Mode OFF

G12 - Circular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion(Machine without Tool Probe)

G13 - Circular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion(Machine without Tool Probe)

G15 17 Polar Coordinates Command OFF

G16 17 Polar Coordinates Command ON

G17 2 XY Plane Selection

G18 2 XZ Plane Selection

G19 2 YZ Plane Selection

G20 6 Inch Data Input

G21 6 Metric Data Input

G22 4 Stored Stroke Check ON

G23 4 Stored Stroke Check OFF

G27 0 Reference Position Return Check

G28 0 Return to Reference Position

G29 0 Return from Reference Position

G30 0 Return to Tool Change Position

G31 0 Skip Function

G39 0 Corner Offset Circular Interpolation

M-377B A-13

Page 226: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G Word Group Definition

G40 7 Tool Diameter Compensation Cancel

G41 7 Tool Diameter Compensation Active (Part Right)

G42 7 Tool Diameter Compensation Active (Part Left)

G43 8 Tool Length Compensation Active

G49 8 Tool Length Compensation Cancel

G50 11 Scaling OFF

G51 11 Scaling ON

G52 0 Set Local Coordinate System

G54 14 Work Coordinate System 1

G55 14 Work Coordinate System 2

G56 14 Work Coordinate System 3

G57 14 Work Coordinate System 4

G58 14 Work Coordinate System 5

G59 14 Work Coordinate System 6

G60 0 Single Direction Positioning

G61 15 Exact Stop Mode

G62 15 Automatic Corner Override

G63 15 Tapping Mode

G64 15 Cutting Mode

G65 0 Non-Modal Macro Call

G66 12 Modal Macro Call

G67 12 Modal Macro Call Cancel

G68 16 Coordinate Rotation ON

G69 16 Coordinate Rotation Off

G71 - Rectangular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion(Machine without Tool Probe)

G72 - Rectangular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion(Machine without Tool Probe)

G73 9 Peck Drilling Cycle

G74 9 Tapping Cycle (Left-hand)

A-14 M-377B

Page 227: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

G Word Group Definition

G76 9 Fine Boring Cycle

G80 9 Cancel Cycle

G81 9 Drilling Cycle

G82 9 Drilling Cycle

G83 9 Peck Drilling Cycle

G84 9 Tapping Cycle (Right-hand)

G85 9 Boring Cycle

G86 9 Boring Cycle

G87 9 Back Boring Cycle

G88 9 Boring Cycle (Manual Retract)

G89 9 Boring Cycle

G90 3 Absolute Positioning Mode

G91 3 Incremental Positioning Mode

G92 0 Coordinate Shift / Constant Surface Speed RPM Limit

G94 5 Inches / Millimeter per Minute Feedrate

G95 5 Inches / Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate

G96 13 Constant Surface Speed

G97 13 Direct RPM Programming

G98 10 Tool to Start Point in Machining Cycles

G99 10 Tool to Return Point in Machining Cycles

M-377B A-15

Page 228: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M CODE LIST(Miscellaneous Codes)

M Word Definition Standard/Option

M00 Program Stop S

M01 Optional Stop S

M02 End of Program S

M03 Spindle Forward S

M04 Spindle Reverse S

M05 Spindle Stop S

M06 Automatic Tool Change S

M08 Coolant Pump ON S

M09 Coolant Pump OFF S

M10 Rotary Table Clamp O

M11 Rotary Table Unclamp O

M13 Spindle Forward / Coolant Pump ON S

M14 Spindle Reverse / Coolant Pump ON S

M15 Spindle Stop / Coolant OFF S

M16 Spindle Air Blast OFF S

M17 Spindle Air Blast ON S

M19 Spindle Orient S

M20 Spindle Orient Cancel S

M21 X Axis Mirror Image S

M22 Y Axis Mirror Image S

M23 Mirror Image Cancel S

M24 Work Light ON S

M25 Work Light OFF S

M29 Rigid Tapping Mode S

M30 End of Program S

M41 Spindle Low Gear (High Torque Machine only) S

A-16 M-377B

Page 229: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M Word Definition Standard/Option

M42 Spindle High Gear (High Torque Machine only) S

M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override S

M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override S

M51 Chip Coolant ON S

M52 Chip Coolant OFF S

M53 Thru-Spindle Coolant ON O

M54 Thru-Spindle Coolant OFF O

M68 Chip Conveyor ON O

M69 Chip Conveyor OFF O

M71 Tool Magazine 1 Arm IN (Home Position) S

M72 Tool Magazine 1 Arm OUT (Spindle) S

M73 Tool Magazine 1 Spindle Tool Clamp S

M74 Tool Magazine 1 Spindle Tool Unclamp S

M75 Search Spindle Tool Number (Magazine 1) S

M76 Activate Tool Change Mode (Magazine 1) S

M77 Cancel Tool Change Mode (Magazine 1) S

M80 Auto Power OFF S

M81 Tool Magazine 2 Arm IN (Home Position) O

M82 Tool Magazine 2 Arm OUT (Spindle) O

M83 Tool Magazine 2 Spindle Tool Clamp O

M84 Tool Magazine 2 Spindle Tool Unclamp O

M85 Search Spindle Tool Number (Magazine 2) O

M86 Activate Tool Change Mode (Magazine 2) O

M87 Cancel Tool Change Mode (Magazine 2) O

M98 Subprogram Call S

M99 Subprogram End S

M100 Circular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion(Machine with Tool Probe)

O

M101 Circular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion(Machine with Tool Probe)

O

M-377B A-17

Page 230: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

M Word Definition Standard/Option

M102 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Clockwise Motion(Machine with Tool Probe)

O

M103 Rectangular Pocket Milling - Counterclockwise Motion(Machine without Tool Probe)

O

A-18 M-377B

Page 231: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

ALARM MESSAGES

1000 LAG. POS. AL.

Alarm #: 1000 Alarm Message: LAG. POS. AL.

CAUSES:

Tool magazine extended for a time greater than thetime limit set by diagnostic register 305.

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, the tool magazine was commanded toretract and it has not retracted within the time limit setby diagnostic register 305.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc18-MC control, the tool magazine was commanded toretract and it has not retracted within the time limit setby PLC timer 3.

Tool magazine “In Position” switch not detected whilethe spindle is running.

Tool magazine “Home” switch not detected during anX, Y, Z, or 4th axis move.

SOLUTIONS:

Check the tool magazine OUT switch for proper ad-justment.

Check the tool magazine HOME switch for proper ad-justment.

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, check the value in diagnostic register305.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc18-MC control, check the value in PLC timer 3.

Check the tool magazine OUT signal.

Check the tool magazine HOME signal.

Alarm #: 1001 Alarm Message: PART REACH

CAUSE:

The number in the Parts Count register is equal thenumber in the Parts Required register.

SOLUTIONS:

To run the machine with the parts counter active, setthe Parts Count register to “0” and restart the ma-chine.

Deactivate the parts counter by setting the Parts Re-quired register to “0”.

M-377B A-19Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 232: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 1002 Alarm Message: SPD.CLAMP AL.

CAUSE:

The Spindle Clamp signal is not detected while thespindle is running.

SOLUTIONS:

Check the Spindle Clamp signal.

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, diagnostic 16, bit 1 should be “1”. If di-agnostic 16, bit 1 is “0”, check the hardware.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M control, di-agnostic X1003.3 should be “1”. If diagnostic X1003.3is “0”, check the hardware.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 18-MC control,diagnostic X1001.5 should be “1”. If diagnosticX1001.5 is “0”, check the hardware.

Check the clamp detect switch for proper adjustment.

Alarm #: 1003 Alarm Message: SPD.UNCLAMP AL.

CAUSE:

The Spindle Unclamp signal is detected while thespindle is running.

SOLUTIONS:

Check the Spindle Unclamp signal.

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, diagnostic 16, bit 3 should be “0”. If di-agnostic 16, bit 3 is “1”, check the hardware.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M control, di-agnostic X1003.2 should be “1”. If diagnostic X1003.2is “0”, check the hardware.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 18-MC control,diagnostic X1001.6 should be “1”. If diagnosticX1001.6 is “0”, check the hardware.

Check the unclamp detect switch for proper adjust-ment.

Alarm #: 1004 Alarm Message: M06 TIME OVER

CAUSE:

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, tool change time is greater than thetime limit set by diagnostic register 355.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc18-MC control, tool change time is greater than thetime limit set by PLC timer 4.

SOLUTION:

Press the Reset key.Command the magazine to the Home position.

A-20 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 233: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 1005 Alarm Message: AIR PRESSURE LOW

CAUSE:

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, main air pressure has dropped belowthe minimum setting for a period exceeding the timelimit set by diagnostic register 375.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc18-MC control, main air pressure has dropped belowthe minimum setting for a period exceeding the timelimit set by PLC timer 7.

The minimum pressure setting is established by thepressure sensor on the air control assembly.

SOLUTIONS:

Adjust the main air pressure setting.

Check the pressure sensor on the air control assem-bly.

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, check the Air Pressure Detect signal,Diagnostic 18, bit 3.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M control,check the Air Pressure Detect signal, DiagnosticX1003.4.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 18-MC control,check the Air Pressure Detect signal, DiagnosticX1002.2.

Alarm #: 1006 Alarm Message: D402 NE D407 (Hardinge / Fanuc System II control)Alarm Message: 01 NE 02 (Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc 18-MC control)

CAUSE:

Magazine #1: counter 1 and counter 2 are not equalafter magazine rotation has stopped.

SOLUTION:

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, refer to Chapter 9 of the operator’smanual (M-378).

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc18-MC control, refer to Chapter 9 of the operator’smanual (M-400).

Alarm #: 1007 Alarm Message: D400 SET ERR.(Hardinge / Fanuc System II control only)

CAUSE:

Diagnostic register 400 is set incorrectly.

SOLUTION:

Set diagnostic register 400 to a value of “20”.

Alarm #: 1008 Alarm Message: FUSE BLOW

CAUSE:

A fuse failure has been detected.

SOLUTION:

Remove all power from the machine and replace thefuse.

M-377B A-21Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 234: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 1009 Alarm Message: D412 NE D417 (Hardinge / Fanuc System II control)Alarm Message: C3 NE C4 (Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc 18-MC control)

CAUSE:

Magazine #2: counter 1 and counter 2 are not equalafter magazine rotation has stopped.

SOLUTION:

On machines equipped with a Hardinge / Fanuc Sys-tem II control, refer to Chapter 9 of the operator’smanual (M-378).

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M or Fanuc18-MC control, refer to Chapter 9 of the operator’smanual (M-400).

Alarm #: 2000 Alarm Message: LUB. TIME OVER

CAUSE:

Lubrication time has expired. Single Block mode isforced.

SOLUTION:

Grease the machine as outlined in the lubricationchapter in the maintenance manual.

Alarm #: 2001 Alarm Message: DOOR OPEN

CAUSES:

In Automatic mode, the main guard door or magazineside door was opened while axis motion was occur-ring.

In Manual mode, the main guard door or magazineside door was opened while axis motion was occur-ring.

SOLUTIONS:

In Automatic mode, close the guard door and pressthe Cycle Start push button to resume program exe-cution.

Restart the required manual axis motion.

A-22 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 235: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 2002 Alarm Message: MAG. INITIAL SET

CAUSE: SOLUTION:

Power was turned OFF or the Reset key was pressedwhile the magazine was moving IN or OUT.

Perform the following:

1. Press Power ON, if necessary.

2. Select Manual Data Input mode.

3. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “1”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“1”.

4. Input an M76 command and execute.

5. Input an M71 command and execute.

6. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “0”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“0”.

7. Press the Reset key.

8. Zero return the machine axes.

Power was turned OFF or the Reset key was pressedwhile the spindle tool was unclamped with the toolmagazine in position, but before the Z axis beganmoving into position.

Perform the following:

1. Press Power ON, if necessary.

2. Select Manual Data Input mode.

3. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “1”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“1”.

4. Input an M76 command and execute.

5. Input an M73 command and execute.

6. Input an M71 command and execute.

7. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “0”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“0”.

8. Press the Reset key.

9. Zero return the machine axes.

M-377B A-23Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 236: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 2002 Alarm Message: MAG. INITIAL SET

CAUSE: SOLUTION:

Power was turned OFF or the Reset key was pressedwhile the Z axis was moving into position for a toolchange.

Perform the following:

1. Press Power ON, if necessary.

2. Select Manual Data Input mode.

3. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “1”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“1”.

4. Input an M76 command and execute.

5. Select Handwheel mode.

6. Select the x1 or x10 increment.

7. Move the Z axis in the + direction until the tool re-leases.

8. Manually remove the tool from the magazine.

9. Select Manual Data Input mode.

10. Input an M73 command and execute.

11. Input an M71 command and execute.

12. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “0”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“0”.

13. Select Jog mode.

14. Install the tool in the spindle.

15. Press the Reset key.

16. Zero return the machine axes.

A-24 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 237: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 2002 Alarm Message: MAG. INITIAL SET

CAUSE: SOLUTION:

Power was turned OFF or the Reset key was pressedwhile the tool magazine was rotating.

Perform the following:

1. Press Power ON, if necessary.

2. Select Manual Data Input mode.

3. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “0”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“0”.

4. Select Jog mode.

5. Rotate the tool magazine to the correct position.

6. Manually remove the tool from the magazine.

7. Select Manual Data Input mode.

8. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “1”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“1”.

9. Input an M76 command and execute

10. Input an M73 command and execute.

11. Input an M71 command and execute.

12. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “0”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“0”.

13. Press the Reset key.

14. Select Jog mode.

15. Install the tool in the spindle.

16. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, verify the values in tool changerdiagnostic registers 402, 407, 450, & 451.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, verify the values in PLCcounters C1 and C2 and tool changer data tableregisters D00 and D01.

17. Zero return the machine axes.

M-377B A-25Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 238: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 2002 Alarm Message: MAG. INITIAL SET

CAUSE: SOLUTION:

Power was turned OFF or the Reset key was pressedwhile the Z axis was moving into position after the toolmagazine stopped rotating.

Perform the following:

1. Press Power ON, if necessary.

2. Select Manual Data Input mode.

3. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “1”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“1”.

5. Select Handwheel mode.

6. Select the x1 or x10 increment.

7. Move the Z axis in the + direction until the tool re-leases.

8. Manually remove the tool from the magazine.

9. Select Manual Data Input mode.

10. Input an M71 command and execute.

11. Input an M73 command and execute.

3. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, set diagnostic register 520, bit 6to “0”.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, set PLC Keep Relay K00 to“0”.

13. Press the Reset key.

14. On machines equipped with a Hardinge / FanucSystem II control, verify the values in tool changerdiagnostic registers 450 & 451.

On machines equipped with a Fanuc 0i-M orFanuc 18-MC control, verify the values in toolchanger data table registers D00 and D01.

15. Select Jog mode.

16. Install the tool in the spindle.

17. Zero return the machine axes.

A-26 M-377BRevised: May 7, 2003

Page 239: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

Alarm #: 2003 Alarm Message: COL. LOW PRESSURE

CAUSE:

Thru-spindle coolant pressure has dropped below theminimum setting for a period exceeding the time limitset by diagnostic register 390. Single Block mode isforced.

SOLUTIONS:

Check the coolant flow. If insufficient coolant is flow-ing, check the coolant filter.

Check the coolant solenoid. Refer to the electrical dia-gram.

Check the setting of the coolant pressure switch. Theswitch should be set to 1Kg/cm3.

Check the pressure switch operation.

Alarm #: 2004 Alarm Message: SCALE AIR LOW P

CAUSE:

Linear scale air pressure has dropped below the minimum setting of1Kg/cm3.The minimum pressure setting is established by the pressure sensor onthe air control assembly.

SOLUTIONS:

Adjust the air pressure setting forthe optional linear scales.

Check the pressure sensor on thelinear scale air control assembly.

Check the air filter for the linearscale air supply.

M-377B A-27Revised: May 7, 2003

Page 240: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

A-28 M-377B

Page 241: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

- NOTES -

M-377B A-29

Page 242: VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers B-0009500-0377.pdfPROGRAMMER’S MANUAL VMC Series II Vertical Machining Centers Equipped with the Hardinge / Fanuc System II, Fanuc 0i-M,

“Performance Has Established Leadership for Hardinge”®

Hardinge Inc.Elmira, New York 14902-1507 USA

Phone: 607-734-2281 Fax: 607-734-8819www.hardinge.com


Recommended